TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
.............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
.............................111
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
...................................213
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
.................................................289
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
..............................................397
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
...............................................423
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
..................................................487
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
.........................................509
10
INDEX
....................................................................517
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction ........................... 4
䡵 How To Use This Manual .................. 4
䡵 Warnings And Cautions ................... 5
䡵 Van Conversions/Campers .................5
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number ............... 6
䡵 Vehicle Modifications / Alterations ........... 7
1
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
4 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body
modifications or special equipment installed by van
conversion/camper manufacturers/ body builders. See
the Warranty information book, Section 2.1.C. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,
stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
service on these items, contact the applicable manufac-
turer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment in-
stalled by the conversion/camper manufacturer should
also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions
are missing, please contact your selling dealer for assis-
tance in obtaining replacement documents from the
applicable manufacturer.
INTRODUCTION 5
1
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on a
stamped plate located on the left front corner of the
instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
window on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient
record of your vehicle identification number and optional
equipment.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN plate.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
INTRODUCTION 7
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys ..................12
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................12
▫ Sentry Key — If Equipped ................12
䡵 Ignition And Steering Lock .................14
▫ Manual Transmissions ...................14
▫ Automatic Transmissions .................15
䡵 Door Key .............................16
䡵 Door Locks ............................17
▫ Manual Locks .........................17
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped ..........18
▫ Child Protection Door Lock ...............21
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped .........22
▫ To Unlock The Doors ...................23
▫ To Lock The Doors .....................23
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................24
▫ General Information ....................25
▫ Transmitter Battery Service ...............25
䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped .........26
2
▫ Rearming Of The System .................26
▫ To Set The Alarm ......................27
▫ To Disarm The System ...................27
䡵 Windows .............................28
▫ Power Windows—If Equipped .............28
▫ Power Sliding Rear Window—If Equipped ....29
▫ Sliding Rear Window—If Equipped .........30
▫ Wind Buffeting ........................30
䡵 Occupant Restraints (1500 Standard And Quad
Cab Only) .............................30
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................31
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ....38
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode –
If Equipped ..........................39
▫ Center Lap Belts .......................40
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ...................40
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) ...........................41
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ............42
▫ Seat Belt Extender ......................42
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbags ...........43
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............54
▫ Child Restraint ........................56
䡵
Occupant Restraints (2500/3500/Mega Cab Only)
..67
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................68
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ....76
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Automatic Locking Restraint (ALR) Mode –
If Equipped ..........................76
▫ Center Lap Belts .......................77
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ...................78
▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) ...........................78
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ............79
▫ Seat Belt Extender ......................80
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbag ............80
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............91
▫ Child Restraint ........................93
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations ..........106
䡵 Safety Tips ...........................107
▫ Transporting Passengers ................107
▫ Lock Your Vehicle .....................107
▫ Exhaust Gas .........................108
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................109
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle .............................109
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
2
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The double sided keys may be inserted into the locks
with either side up. The keys for your new vehicle are
enclosed in a plastic bag with a bar code label affixed to
the front. The bar code can be used to order duplicate
keys from your dealer or a locksmith. If you received
your keys without the bag, ask your dealer to give you
the number.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door when the key is in the
ignition switch, a chime will sound to remind you to
remove the key.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock
all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED
With this system, an electronically coded ignition key
sends a signal to the vehicle electronics. If the electronics
recognizes the signal, the vehicle will start and continue
to run. If the system does not recognize the signal the
vehicle will start and run for a maximum of 2 seconds
after the initial key ON. After six unsuccessful attempts
at starting, the system will shut down until the correct
key is used.
NOTE: The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not
compatible with remote starting systems. Use of these
systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a
loss of security protection. Additional Sentry Keys or
Mobil Speed-pass™ devices held against or immediately
adjacent to the ignition key when starting the engine may
cause vehicle starting problems. If a problem occurs,
remove the Sentry Key from the key-ring and attempt to
start the vehicle again. Pagers, cell phones, walkman, etc.
will have no effect on this system.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ⬙Security Light⬙, located in the instrument cluster,
will illuminate for about 3 seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned to the ON position. If the vehicle
electronics do not receive a valid signal from the ignition
key, the ⬙Security Light⬙ will flash continuously to signal
that the vehicle has been immobilized. If the ⬙Security
Light⬙ remains on during vehicle operation, it indicates a
fault in the system electronics. If this option was ordered,
all of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been
programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN. This number is required for dealer
replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be per-
formed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer
Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A
blank key is one which has never been programmed and
needs to be cut.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys to the dealer.
Customer Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid keys by doing the following:
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition and turn the
ignition to the ON position for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition back to the OFF
position and remove the first key.
2. Insert the second valid key and switch the ignition to
the ON position within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
2
⬙Security Light⬙ will begin to flash. Turn the ignition back
to the OFF position and remove the second key.
3. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition and switch
the ignition to the ON position within 60 seconds of
having removed the second key. After 10 seconds the
⬙Security Light⬙ will stop flashing, then turn on for 3
seconds; then turn off.
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. The Keyless
Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this
procedure. Repeat this process to program up to an
additional 6 keys. A maximum of 8 keys can be pro-
grammed to the system, including the original keys
provided with the vehicle.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION AND STEERING LOCK
Insert the key fully, and then turn the switch to one of the
five illustrated positions. The key can be inserted or
withdrawn only in the LOCK position.
Manual Transmissions
When the steering wheel is in the LOCK position, the
steering and ignition systems are locked to provide
antitheft protection for your vehicle. It may be difficult to
turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your
vehicle. Move the steering wheel left and right while
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
turning the key until it turns easily. To remove the key,
depress and hold the release button located between the
ignition switch and the instrument panel. Turn the igni-
tion key to LOCK and remove the key.
Automatic Transmissions
In the LOCK position, the steering and ignition systems
are locked to provide antitheft protection for your ve-
hicle. It may be difficult to turn the key from the LOCK
position when starting your vehicle. Move the steering
wheel left and right while turning the key until it turns
easily. The key can be inserted or withdrawn only in the
LOCK position. Push in on the key in the ignition lock
cylinder to rotate to the LOCK position.
Ignition Switch Positions
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
NOTE: The steering wheel will lock when the key is
removed, and the steering wheel is turned around 115
degrees from center clockwise and around 65 degrees
counterclockwise.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission, the key cannot be turned to LOCK until the
selector is in the PARK position. Do not attempt to pull
the shift lever out of PARK after the key is in the LOCK
position.
DOOR KEY
The same key used to start the vehicle is also used to
unlock the doors. To unlock the vehicle doors, insert the
key into the lock and turn.
To lock the doors, insert the key and turn.
Ignition Switch Positions
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Locks
Front and Rear doors may be locked, by moving the lock
plunger up or down.
All doors may be opened with the inside door handle
without lifting the lock plunger. Doors locked before
closing will remain locked when closed.
The ignition key will unlock all the locks on your vehicle.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju-
ries and death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with remote keyless entry do
not have a passenger side door lock cylinder.
Vehicles equipped with power door locks can be locked
or unlocked from inside by either the use of the door lock
switches located on the front doors or by pressing the
LOCK or UNLOCK buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry
key fob (if equipped).
As a safety feature the doors will not lock when using the
door lock switches during the following condition:
•
The driver’s door is open while the key is in the
ignition.
Power Door Lock Switch Location
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Door Locks
If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph.
This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped
from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the
following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four
times; ending in the LOCK position ( Do not start the
engine ).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the LOCK direction.
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
been disabled.
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
Auto Unlock Feature
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
any door is opened. This will occur only after the vehicle
has been shifted into the Park position after the vehicle
has been driven (shifted out of Park and all doors closed).
This feature will not operate if there is any manual
operation of the power door locks (Lock or Unlock).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
Auto Unlock Feature Programming
Customer Programming sequence to enable or disable
the Auto Unlock Feature:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel
any chimes that may be confusing during this program-
ming procedure).
3. Insert the key into the ignition.
4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four
times ending in the LOCK position (do not start the
engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the UNLOCK direction.
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
been changed.
7. Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of
this feature.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be changed. If necessary repeat
the above procedure.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the child-
protection door lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door and slide the
control UP to engage the locks and DOWN to disengage
the child-protection locks. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
Child Protection Door Lock Location
Child Lock Control
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: After setting the child protection door lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from
distances up to about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held
radio transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at
the vehicle to activate the system.
Three Button Transmitter
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the doors:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors. When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the
illuminated entry will initiate, the parking lights will
flash on twice and if installed, the cargo lamp will turn on
for 30 seconds.
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors or
drivers door only upon the first UNLOCK button press
by using the following procedure:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on your key fob.
3. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds,
but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.
4. Release both buttons at the same time.
5. This will allow you to unlock all doors on the first
press of the UNLOCK button.
To lock the doors:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors are
locked, the parking lights will flash on once and the horn
will chirp once.
The horn chirp feature will be shipped from the assembly
plants activated. If desired this feature can be disabled by
using the following procedure:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
(i.e. functional) key fob.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
3. Continue to hold the LOCK button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the PANIC button. Release both buttons at the same
time.
4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with
the park lamp flash feature activated. If desired, this
feature can be disabled by using the following procedure:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
(i.e. functional) key fob.
3. Continue to hold the UNLOCK button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the LOCK button. Release both buttons at the same
time.
4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Using the Panic Alarm
To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press
and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once.
When the Panic mode is activated, the interior lights will
illuminate, the headlamps and parking lights will flash,
and the horn will sound.
To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC
button on the transmitter a second time. Panic mode will
automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is
started and exceeds 15 mph. During the Panic Mode, the
door locks and remote keyless entry systems will func-
tion normally. Panic mode will not disarm the security
system on vehicles so equipped.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your Keyless Entry Transmitter fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of the
batteries is from one to two years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement battery is a 3V lithium
2016 cell. This transmitter requires two batteries.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. With transmitter buttons facing down, use a flat blade
or dime to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.
Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during
removal.
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Be careful not to
disturb the metal terminal near the batteries. Install the
batteries with the positive terminal up, reference the note
⬙+ SIDE UP⬙ on the inside of the bottom half of the
transmitter case. Avoid touching the new batteries with
your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If
you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the transmitter case snap the two halves
together. Make sure there is an even gap between the two
halves. Test transmitter operation.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
system provides both audible and visual signals. For the
first 3 minutes the horn will sound and the headlights
and security telltale will flash repeatedly. For an addi-
tional 15 minutes only the headlights and security telltale
will flash. The engine will run only if a valid Sentry Key
is used to start the vehicle. Use of the Sentry Key will
disable the alarm.
Rearming of the System:
The security system will rearm itself after the 15 addi-
tional minutes of headlights and security telltale flashing,
if the system has not been disabled. If the condition
which initiated the alarm is still present, the system will
ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors
and ignition.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Set the Alarm:
The alarm will set when you use the power door locks, or
use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors. After
all the doors are locked and closed the SECURITY light in
the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the
system is arming. The security light in the instrument
panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to
indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set,
the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate
that the system is armed.
NOTE: If the SECURITY light stays on continuously
during vehicle operation, have the system checked by
your dealer.
To Disarm the System:
Use the Keyless Entry transmitter to unlock the door. If
something has triggered the system in your absence, the
horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors
and the security lamp will flash for 30 seconds. Check the
vehicle for tampering.
The Security system will also disarm, if the vehicle is
started with a programmed Sentry Key. If an unpro-
grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle, the engine
will run for 2 seconds and then the security alarm will be
initiated. To exit alarming mode, press the transmitter
Unlock button, or start the vehicle with a programmed
Sentry Key.
The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, the alarm
will sound when you pull the door handle to exit. The
door will be locked but the Security Alarm will not arm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
WINDOWS
Power Windows—If Equipped
The control on the left front door panel has up-down
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
the front passenger door for passenger window control
and on the rear doors of Quad Cab and Mega Cab
models. The windows will operate only when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the ON or ACC (Accessory)
position.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
Auto Down (Driver’s Side Only)
The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature.
Press the window switch past the detent, release, and the
window will go down automatically.
Power Window Switches
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Window Lockout Switch (4 Door Models Only)
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lock button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
Power Sliding Rear Window—If Equipped
The power sliding rear window switch is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls. Press the
right side of the switch to open the glass and the left side
of the switch to close the glass.
Window Lockout Switch
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
Sliding Rear Window—If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down or partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and
rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS (1500 STANDARD and
QUAD CAB ONLY)
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and, if so
equipped, window bags for the driver and passengers
seated next to a window. If you will be carrying children
too small for adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be
used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Quad Cab front center
seating position have combination lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for
more than one person, no matter what their size.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
WARNING!
• A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect
you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on
your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increas-
ing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. And a
belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries.
Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt
over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be
used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Removing Slack From Belt
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the airbag deployed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
Standard Cab Front Center Three Point Belt
1. The front center seat belt on the Standard Cab may be
disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas
behind the front seats. The black latch plate can be
detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on
the inboard side of the passenger seat. Insert the vehicle
ignition key into the center white slot on the black buckle.
The black buckle latch plate can be removed when the
key is pressed into the buckle. Allow the retractor to take
up the surplus webbing, and the buckles will hang
vertically from the cab back exit bezel, thus freeing up all
the area behind the front seats.
2. To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat, pull
the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back
panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there
is an audible click. Refer to the previous section for the
proper seat belt usage.
Detaching Buckle With Key
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
If the black latch and black buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
•
When reattaching the black latch and black
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the black latch and
black buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the black latch and black buckle.
Inserting Latch Plate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
WARNING!
If the black latch and buckle are not connected when
the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not restrain you properly.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
away from your neck. Press the button located on the
upper belt guide, and then move it up or down to the
position that serves you best.
In Use Position
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode – If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is avail-
able on all passenger seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger
seating position. Children 12 years old and under should
be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible.
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock-
ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Center Lap Belts
The center seating position for the Quad Cab front seat
has a lap belt only. To fasten the lap belt, slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ To lengthen
the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull. To remove slack,
pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug
against the hips. Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust
the belt as tightly as is comfortable.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous.
•
A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down
and under the belt in a collision.
•
A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash
forces to the abdomen, not to the stronger hip
bones. In either case, the risk of internal injuries
is greater. Wear a lap belt low and snug.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt system in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the airbag control
module. Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use
items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy
the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
if the ignition is cycled, driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for
more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-
mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
1. With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any
position except On or Start, buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
fully completed the programming.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
vated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbags
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
steering wheel. The passenger front airbag is mounted in
the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to
protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next
to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window
bags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
WARNING!
•
Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured be-
cause the airbags are no longer functional. These
protective covers for the airbag cushions are de-
signed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do
not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the location of the window bag. The area
where the window bag is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of
the vehicle for any reason.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Window
bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
If your vehicle is so equipped, the window bag on the
crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to
severe side collisions. But even in collisions where the
airbags work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the
right position for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts
properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate.
4. If your vehicle has window bags, do not lean against
the door or window, airbags will inflate forcefully into
the space between you and the door.
5.
If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
Center. Phone numbers are provided in the ⬙If You Need
Customer Assistance⬙ section later in this owner’s manual.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
•
If the vehicle has window bags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
Air Bag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller
•
Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (If Equipped)
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Driver Airbag
•
Passenger Airbag
•
Window Bags above Side Windows (If Equipped)
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Interconnecting Wiring
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Front Acceleration Sensors
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Driver Seat Track Position Sensor (If Equipped)
•
Passenger Side Frontal Airbag ON/OFF Switch (Stan-
dard Cab Vehicles Only)
•
Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light (Stan-
dard Cab Vehicles Only)
How the Airbag System Works
•
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-
signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC will not
detect roll over.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and
column, and knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition,
the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC may
deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone.
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds
for a self-check when the ignition is first turned
on. After the self-check, the AIRBAG warning
light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any
part of the system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound if the light comes on again after initial start up.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have the airbag system
checked right away.
•
The Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
(If Equipped) (an amber light located in the center of
the instrument panel) tells the driver and front pas-
senger when the front passenger airbag is turned off.
The PAD Indicator lamp illuminates the words ⬙PASS
AIR BAG OFF⬙ to show that the passenger airbag will
not inflate during a collision requiring airbags. The
PAD light will illuminate when the passenger frontal
airbag has been turned off by using the manual on/off
switch (standard cab models only). See Passenger
Airbag On/Off Switch – (Standard Cab Vehicles Only)
in this section for additional information.
•
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
may be possible based on collision severity and occu-
pant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
way the airbags do not interfere with your control of
the vehicle.
•
The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to
activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC
(with side impact option) detects a collision requiring
the window bags to inflate, it signals the inflators on
the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas
is generated to inflate the window bag. The inflating
window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner
out of the way and covers the window. The airbag
inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one quarter of
the time it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force
to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the
window bag inflates. This especially applies to chil-
dren. The window bag is only about 3-1/2 inches (9
cm) thick when it is inflated.
•
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger, and position every-
one for the best interaction with the front airbag.
NOTE: At no time should any supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch – (Standard Cab
Vehicles Only)
The passenger front airbag is to be turned off only if the
passenger:
•
is an infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the
front seat because there is no rear seat, because the rear
seat is too small for a rear-facing infant restraint or
because the infant has a medical condition which
makes it necessary for the driver to be able to see the
infant,
•
is a child, age 1 to 12 who must ride in the front seat
because there is no rear seat, because there is no rear
seat position available, or because the child has a
medical condition which makes it necessary for the
driver to be able to see the child,
•
has a medical condition which makes passenger airbag
inflation (deployment) a greater risk for the passenger
than the risk of hitting the dashboard (instrument
panel) or windshield in a crash.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Whenever an airbag is turned off, even a lap/
shoulder belted passenger may hit their head, neck,
or chest on the dashboard (instrument panel) or
windshield in a crash. This may result in serious
injury or death.
To Shut Off the Passenger Airbag (Standard Cab Ve-
hicles Only)
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch, push the key in and turn clockwise, and remove
the key from the switch. This will shut off the passenger
side airbag. The “Off” light near the switch will illumi-
nate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
To Turn On the Passenger Airbag (Standard Cab Ve-
hicles Only)
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch, push the key in and turn counterclockwise, and
remove the key from the switch. This will turn on the
passenger airbag. The “Off” light near the switch will be
off when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags
when the impact sensors detect a moderate-to-severe
frontal collision, to help restrain the driver and front
passenger, and then immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately. As the airbags deflate you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-
product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas
used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin
or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufac-
turer’s instructions for cleaning.
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to
fail when you need it. You could be injured if the airbag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag
system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function
properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service. If your
seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced
in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with
disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a collision. Do not
mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the
knee bolsters.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system
yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an airbag system.
Enhanced Accident Response System
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
moving, the interior lights will light until the ignition
switch is turned off.
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
•
The airbag light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.
•
The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
•
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine
related gauges are not working, the airbag control mod-
ule may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check fuse block
for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of
the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses. See your
dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is
designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle
data parameters (see the following list) in the event data
recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment.
Please note that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag
deploys, and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction
with other data gathered during a complete accident
investigation, the electronic data may be used by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may
be requested by customers, insurance carriers, govern-
ment officials, and professional crash researchers, such as
those associated with universities, and with hospital and
insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative),
the company or its designated representative will first
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the US govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora-
tion to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a
DaimlerChrysler Corporation product
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
•
Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
•
⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
•
Seatbelt status
•
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
•
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
•
Engine control status (including engine speed)
•
Cruise control status
•
Traction/stability control status
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants and Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is
correct for your child:
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag
unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag deployment
could cause severe injury or death to infants in this
position.
•
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
•
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seat back,
they should use a belt-positioning-booster seat. The
child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the
lap portion.) For further information refer to
www.seatcheck.org.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat, or in the front seat if the
passenger’s front airbag is Off. If the airbag is left
On, a rearward facing child restraint in the front
seat may be struck by a deploying passenger
airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to
the infant.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
The passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic
Locking Retractors (ALR), which are designed to keep
the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that
it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to
allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide
the latch plate into the buckle. Then pull on the belt
until it is all removed from the retractor. Allow the belt
to return to the retractor, pulling on the excess web-
bing to tighten the lap portion about the child re-
straint. Refer to the ⬙Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) Mode⬙ earlier in this section.
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions exactly when install-
ing an infant or child restraint.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. LATCH child restraint
anchorage systems are installed in the Standard Cab
passenger seat position and the Quad Cab rear seat
outboard positions. LATCH equipped seating positions
feature both lower anchor bars, located at the back of the
seat cushion, and tether strap anchorages, located behind
the seatback (refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchor later
in this section).
NOTE: For children riding in the front seat of a Stan-
dard Cab model refer to the “Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch” located in this section.
Standard Cab Passenger Seat
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
older products.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
Quad Cab Rear Outboard Seats
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com-
patible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belt.
Installing the Child Restraint System
WARNING!
Do not install child restraint systems equipped with
LATCH attachments in the center position of a Quad
Cab model rear seat. The LATCH anchorages in this
seat are designed for the two outboard seating posi-
tions only. A child may be placed in the rear center
seating position of a Quad Cab model using the seat
belt and child tether anchorage. Failure to follow this
may result in serious or fatal injury.
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for con-
nection to tether anchors have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for their older products.
Regular Cab models of Ram Pickups have two tether
anchorages, one each behind the front center and right
seats. Quad Cab models have three anchorages, one
behind each of the rear seats.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the
anchor positions directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap. Follow the
instructions below. See your dealer for help if nec-
essary.
Tether Anchorage Points at the Right and Center
Front Seat (Regular Cab - All Seats)
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under
the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
2. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to
the square opening in the sheet metal.
3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence -
(Quad Cab Rear Seats)
1. Obtain tether straps by raising the head restraints and
reaching between the rear glass and rear seat. The tether
strap may be retained with an elastic band. Accessibility
to the tether strap is greatly improved by raising the seat
cushion to the “up” position. Remove the elastic before
use.
2. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and
then to the anchor directly behind the center rear seat.
3. Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint
and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat.
4. Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center
seat, and attach the hooks to the metal ring.
5. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and
to the anchor directly behind the right seat.
6. Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
Multiple Child Restraint Quad Cab
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS (2500/3500/MEGA CAB
ONLY)
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and, if so
equipped, window bags for the driver and passengers
seated next to a window. If you will be carrying children
too small for adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be
used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Quad Cab front center
seating position have combination lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for
more than one person, no matter what their size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.
And a belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear
the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Removing Slack From Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the airbag deployed.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Standard Cab Front Center Three Point Belt
1. The front center seat belt on the Standard Cab may be
disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas
behind the front seats. The black latch plate can be
detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on
the inboard side of the passenger seat. Insert the vehicle
ignition key into the center white slot on the black buckle.
The black buckle latch plate can be removed when the
key is pressed into the buckle. Allow the retractor to take
up the surplus webbing, and the buckles will hang
vertically from the cab back exit bezel, thus freeing up all
the area behind the front seats.
2. To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat, pull
the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back
panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there
is an audible click. Refer to the previous section for the
proper seat belt usage.
Detaching Buckle with Key
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
WARNING!
•
If the black latch and black buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
•
When reattaching the black latch and black
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the black latch and
black buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the black latch and black buckle.
Inserting Latch Plate
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
If the black latch and buckle are not connected when
the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not restrain you properly.
In Use Position
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
away from your neck. Press the button located on the
upper belt guide, and then move it up or down to the
position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Automatic Locking Restraint (ALR) Mode – If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is avail-
able on all passenger seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger
seating position. Children 12 years old and under should
be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock-
ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Center Lap Belts
The center seating position for the Quad Cab front seat
has a lap belt only. To fasten the lap belt, slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ To lengthen
the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull. To remove slack,
pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug
against the hips. Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust
the belt as tightly as is comfortable.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous.
•
A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down
and under the belt in a collision.
•
A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash
forces to the abdomen, not to the stronger hip
bones. In either case, the risk of internal injuries
is greater. Wear a lap belt low and snug.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
2
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt system in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the airbag control
module. Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use
items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy
the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
if the ignition is cycled, driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for
more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-
mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
1. With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any
position except On or Start, buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Warning
Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
4.
Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to signify
that you have successfully completed the programming.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
vated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
2
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbag
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations
that allow less forceful deployments.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to
protect the driver and passengers in the first and second
row sitting next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped
with window bags, they are located above the side
windows. Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or
attempt to manually open them. You may damage the
airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are
not there to protect you. These protective covers for the
airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags
are inflating.
• Do not mount any aftermarket equipment such as trailer
brake controllers, snowplow controllers, auxiliary light
switches, radios, etc. on or behind the knee bolster. Knee
bolsters are designed to work with the air bag and seat belt
to protect you. Mounting any additional equipment on or
behind the knee bolster can cause injury during a crash.
• If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do not stack
luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location
of the window bag. The area where the window bag is
located should remain free from any obstructions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do not have
any accessory items installed which will alter the roof,
including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
2
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with the seatbelts, front airbags work with the instrument
panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for
the driver and front passenger. Window bags also work
with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is so equipped,
the window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is
triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain
types of collisions, both the front and side airbags may be
triggered. But even in collisions where the airbags work,
you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position
for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
•
Children 12 years and under should ride buckled up in
a rear seat, if available.
•
Infants in rear facing child restraints must NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front
airbag unless the airbag is turned off (Standard Cab
Vehicles Only). An airbag deployment can cause se-
vere injury or death to infants in that position. See the
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch section.
•
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat, see the
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch section.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (see section on Child Restraints)
should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster
seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat.
Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
•
All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
•
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to
inflate.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
•
If the vehicle has window airbags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
2
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Airbag Control Module
•
AIRBAG Readiness Light
•
Driver Airbag
•
Passenger Airbag
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Crash Sensor
•
Interconnecting Wiring
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Passenger Side Frontal Airbag ON/OFF Switch (Stan-
dard Cab Vehicles Only)
The Window Airbag System, on vehicles equipped,
consists of the following:
•
AIRBAG Readiness Light (shared with the front airbag
system)
•
Window Bags Above the Side Windows.
•
Airbag Control Module (shared with the front airbag
system)
•
Side impact sensors
•
Interconnecting Wiring
How The Airbag System Works
•
The airbag control module determines if a frontal
collision is severe enough to require the airbags to
inflate.
•
The airbag control module will not detect roll over, or
rear collisions.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The airbag control module also monitors the readiness
of the electronic parts of the system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions.
These include all of the items listed above except the
knee bolsters, the instrument panel, and the steering
wheel and column. If the key is in the ⬙Off⬙ position, in
the ACC position or not in the ignition, the airbags are
not on and will not inflate
•
The airbag control module also turns on the AIR BAG
light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds when
the ignition is first turned on, then turns the light off.
•
If it detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the light either momen-
tarily or continuously. The instrument clus-
ter will flash the seat belt indicator if it
detects a fault with the airbag indicator.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIR BAG light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked
right away.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
2
•
When the airbag control module detects a collision
requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A
large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate
the airbags. The airbag covers separate and fold out of
the way as the airbags inflate to their full size. The
airbags fully inflate in milliseconds. This is less time
than it takes you to blink your eyes. The airbags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger. The driver’s front airbag deflates
through vents towards the instrument panel. The
passenger’s front airbag is deflated through vent holes
in the sides of the airbag. In this way the airbags do
not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
•
The knee impact bolsters help protect the knees and
position you for the best interaction with the front
airbag.
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch – (Standard Cab
Vehicles Only)
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The passenger front airbag is to be turned off only if the
passenger:
•
is an infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the
front seat because there is no rear seat, because the rear
seat is too small for a rear-facing infant restraint or
because the infant has a medical condition which
makes it necessary for the driver to be able to see the
infant,
•
is a child, age 1 to 12 who must ride in the front seat
because there is no rear seat, because there is no rear
seat position available, or because the child has a
medical condition which makes it necessary for the
driver to be able to see the child,
•
has a medical condition which makes passenger airbag
inflation (deployment) a greater risk for the passenger
than the risk of hitting the dashboard (instrument
panel) or windshield in a crash.
WARNING!
Whenever an airbag is turned off, even a lap/
shoulder belted passenger may hit their head, neck,
or chest on the dashboard (instrument panel) or
windshield in a crash. This may result in serious
injury or death.
To Shut Off the Passenger Airbag (Standard Cab Ve-
hicles Only)
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch, push the key in and turn clockwise, and remove
the key from the switch. This will shut off the passenger
side airbag. The “Off” light near the switch will illumi-
nate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
2
To Turn On the Passenger Airbag (Standard Cab Ve-
hicles Only)
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch, push the key in and turn counterclockwise, and
remove the key from the switch. This will turn on the
passenger airbag. The “Off” light near the switch will be
off when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the air bag
control module detects a moderate-to-severe frontal col-
lision, and then immediately to deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The abra-
sions are similar to friction rope burns or those you
might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor.
They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are
not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if
you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
•
As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another colli-
sion. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Window Airbags Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)—If Equipped
The window airbag control module determines if a side
collision is severe enough to require the side airbags to
inflate. The window airbag control module will not
detect roll over, front or rear collisions.
The airbag control module monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition
switch is in the ⬙START⬙ or ⬙RUN⬙ positions. These
include all of the items listed above. The airbag control
module also turns on the AIRBAG light in the instrument
panel for 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition is first turned
on as a diagnostic or system check, then turns the light
off. If it detects a malfunction in any part of the system,
it turns on the light either momentarily or continuously.
The side (window) impact SRS Airbags are designed to
activate only in certain side collisions. When the airbag
control module detects a collision requiring the window
bags to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of
the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the window bag. The inflating window bag
pushes the side pillar molding out of the way and covers
the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds
(about one-quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes)
with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
2
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the window bag inflates. This especially applies to
children. The window bag is only about 3
1
⁄
2
inches (8.9
cm) thick when it is inflated.
Enhanced Accident Response System
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
moving, the interior lights will light until the ignition
switch is turned off.
Maintaining Your Airbag Systems
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured because the airbags are not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or stickers to
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the
front bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.
•
You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolster.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
•
The airbag light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.
•
The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
•
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine
related gauges are not working, the airbag control mod-
ule may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check fuse num-
bers 52 and 53 in the fuse and relay center. See your
dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is
designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle
data parameters (see the following list) in the event data
recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment.
Please note that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag
deploys, and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction
with other data gathered during a complete accident
investigation, the electronic data may be used by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
2
be requested by customers, insurance carriers, govern-
ment officials, and professional crash researchers, such as
those associated with universities, and with hospital and
insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative),
the company or its designated representative will first
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the US govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora-
tion to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a
DaimlerChrysler Corporation product
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
•
⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
•
Seatbelt status
•
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
•
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
•
Engine control status (including engine speed)
•
Cruise control status
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
2
Infants and Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is
correct for your child:
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag
unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag deployment
could cause severe injury or death to infants in this
position.
•
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seat back,
they should use a belt-positioning-booster seat. The
child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped
with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the
lap portion.) For further information refer to
www.seatcheck.org.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat, or in the front seat if the
passenger’s front airbag is Off. If the airbag is left
On, a rearward facing child restraint in the front
seat may be struck by a deploying passenger
airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to
the infant.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
2
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
The passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic
Locking Retractors (ALR), which are designed to keep
the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that
it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to
allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide
the latch plate into the buckle. Then pull on the belt
until it is all removed from the retractor. Allow the belt
to return to the retractor, pulling on the excess web-
bing to tighten the lap portion about the child re-
straint. Refer to the ⬙Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) Mode⬙ earlier in this section.
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions exactly when install-
ing an infant or child restraint.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. LATCH child restraint
anchorage systems are installed in the Standard Cab
passenger seat position and the Quad Cab rear seat
outboard positions. LATCH equipped seating positions
feature both lower anchor bars, located at the back of the
seat cushion, and tether strap anchorages, located behind
the seatback (refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchor later
in this section).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
2
Identification dots are located above the standard cab
front seat lower anchorages as a guide for locating lower
anchors.
NOTE: For children riding in the front seat of a Stan-
dard Cab model refer to the “Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch” located in this section.
Standard Cab Passenger Seat
Quad Cab Rear Outboard Seats
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
older products.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
Mega Cab Rear Seats
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
2
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com-
patible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belting.
Installing the Child Restraint System
WARNING!
Do not install child restraint systems equipped with
LATCH attachments in the center position of a Quad
Cab model rear seat. The LATCH anchorages in this
seat are designed for the two outboard seating posi-
tions only. A child may be placed in the rear center
seating position of a Quad Cab model using the seat
belt and child tether anchorage. Failure to follow this
may result in serious or fatal injury.
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for con-
nection to tether anchors have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for their older products.
Regular Cab models of Ram Pickups have two tether
anchorages, one each behind the front center and right
seats. Quad Cab and Mega Cab models have three
anchorages, one behind each of the rear seats.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
2
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the
anchor positions directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap. Follow the
instructions below. See your dealer for help if nec-
essary.
Tether Anchorage Points at the Right and Center
Front Seat (Regular Cab - All Seats)
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under
the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
2. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to
the square opening in the sheet metal.
3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence -
(Quad Cab Rear Seats)
1. Obtain tether straps by raising the head restraints and
reaching between the rear glass and rear seat. The tether
strap may be retained with an elastic band. Accessibility
to the tether strap is greatly improved by raising the seat
cushion to the “up” position. Remove the elastic before
use.
2. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and
then to the anchor directly behind the center rear seat.
3. Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint
and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat.
4. Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center
seat, and attach the hooks to the metal ring.
5. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and
to the anchor directly behind the right seat.
6. Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
2
Multiple Child Restraint Quad Cab
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tether Anchorage Points at All Three Seating
Positions (Mega Cab)
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under
the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
2. Lift the cover, and attach the hook to the square
opening in the sheet metal.
3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
Mega Cab Tether Strap Mounting
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
2
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300
miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds
up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While
cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the limits
of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Avoid wide open throttle acceleration in low gear.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality, energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with the anticipated cli-
matic conditions under which vehicle operation will
occur. The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
discussed in Section 7 under Maintenance Procedures,
Engine Oil.
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles of operation. This is a normal part of the
break-in and is not an indication of difficulty.
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) your new
vehicle is driven, do not tow a trailer. Doing so
may damage your vehicle.
•
Limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h) during the
first 500 miles (805 km) of towing.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
This vehicle is designed to carry passengers in the cab
only. For safety reasons, NEVER TRANSPORT PASSEN-
GERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Lock Your Vehicle
Always remove the keys from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended, even in your
own driveway or garage. Try to park your vehicle in a
well-lighted area and never invite theft by leaving ar-
ticles of value exposed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
2
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, a poten-
tially toxic gas that by itself is colorless and odorless.
To avoid inhaling these gases, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in
or out of the area.
•
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for more than a short period, adjust
your climate control system to force outside air into
the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed and the
controls in any position except OFF or MAX A/C.
•
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system;
exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle; or damage to
the underside or rear of the vehicle. Have a competent
mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adja-
cent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace or adjust as required.
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.)
or if the front airbags have deployed. If there is any question
regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see you
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer. If there is a problem with the airbag light the
seatbelt light will flash.
Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns.
Check for stones, nails, glass or other objects lodged in
the tread.
Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check wheel
nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure.
Lights
Check the operation of all exterior lights. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if fuel fumes are
detected the cause should be located and corrected.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors ..............................116
▫ Inside Mirror ........................116
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror— If Equipped . . . 117
▫ Outside Mirrors ......................117
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature ..........118
▫ Electronic Power Mirrors — If Equipped .....118
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster And Heated
Sideview Mirrors — If Equipped ..........119
▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped ......119
䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) —
If Equipped ...........................121
▫ Operations ..........................123
▫ Phone Call Features ...................130
▫ UConnect™ System Features .............132
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ............137
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect™ System ....................139
䡵 Seats ................................144
▫ 40-20-40 Front Seat ....................145
3
▫ Reclining Seats (1500 Standard And Quad Cab
Models) ............................146
▫ Reclining Seats
(2500/3500/Mega Cab Models) ...........147
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints ..............147
▫ Manual Rotary Lumbar Support Adjustment —
If Equipped .........................148
▫ Power Seats (1500 Standard And Quad Cab
Models) — If Equipped .................149
▫ Power Seats (2500/3500/Mega Cab Models) —
If Equipped .........................151
▫ Rear Seat Features — Mega Cab Models .....153
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped .............158
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood .............160
䡵 Lights ...............................161
▫ Interior Lights .......................162
▫ Battery Saver ........................163
▫ Headlamp Delay ......................163
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights .....164
▫ Daytime Running Lights
(Canada Only And Fleet Vehicles) ..........164
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................165
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............165
▫ Cargo Light — If Equipped ..............165
䡵 Multifunction Control Lever ...............166
▫ Turn Signals .........................166
▫ Passing Light ........................166
▫ High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch ......167
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Windshield Wipers ....................167
▫ Windshield Washers ...................168
䡵 Tilt Steering Column ....................169
䡵 Driver Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped ......170
▫ Adjustment .........................171
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ......172
▫ To Activate ..........................172
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed ...............172
▫ To Deactivate ........................172
▫ To Resume Speed .....................173
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............173
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............174
䡵 Overhead Console— If Equipped ...........175
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights ................176
䡵 Overhead Console With Compass/Temperature
Mini-Trip Computer — If Equipped ..........176
▫ US/M Button ........................177
▫ Reset Button .........................177
▫ Global Reset .........................178
▫ Step Button .........................178
▫ Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) ........178
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) ...............178
▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) ..................179
▫ Elapsed Time (ET) .....................179
▫ C/T Button .........................180
▫ Automatic Compass Calibration ...........180
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
3
▫ Manual Compass Calibration .............181
▫ Recalibrating The Compass ..............181
▫ Outside Temperature ...................183
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped .........183
▫ Programming HomeLink ................185
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 187
▫ Using HomeLink .....................188
▫ Erasing HomeLink Buttons ..............188
▫ Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button . . . 188
▫ Security ............................189
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped .............189
▫ Open Sunroof - Express Mode ............190
▫ Comfort Stop ........................190
▫ Closing Sunroof - Express ...............191
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................191
▫ Pinch Protect Override .................191
▫ Venting Sunroof - Express ...............191
▫ Sunshade Operation ...................191
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................192
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................192
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed ...................192
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets ..................192
䡵 Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver ............194
䡵 Cupholders ...........................195
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders
(40–20–40 Seats) — Automatic Transmission . . 195
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders (Bucket Seats)
— Automatic Transmission ..............197
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Manual
Transmission ........................197
▫ Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab —
If Equipped .........................198
▫ Rear Cupholder — Mega Cab ............198
䡵 Storage ..............................199
▫ Center Storage Compartment (40–20–40 Seat) —
If Equipped .........................199
▫ Center Storage Compartment (Bucket Seats)—
If Equipped .........................200
▫ Storage And Seats (Quad Cab Models) ......202
▫ Storage And Seats (Mega Cab Models) ......202
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
(Mega Cab Models) ....................204
䡵 Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped .........204
▫ Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped ........204
䡵 Pickup Box ...........................207
䡵 Slide-In Campers .......................209
▫ Camper Applications ...................209
䡵 Easy-Off Tailgate .......................209
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
3
MIRRORS
Inside Mirror
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Adjusting Rear View Mirror
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror— If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror.
A light in the button will indicate when the dimming
feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
3
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in a right side convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on your right side
convex mirror could cause you to collide with an-
other vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen
in the right side convex mirror. Some vehicles will
not have a convex right side mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature
All6x9inch exterior mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist damage. The
hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full
rearward, and normal.
Electronic Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
Power Mirror Movement
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Set the top switch to the left or right for the left or right
mirror, and set it to the center off position to prevent
accidentally moving a mirror when you are finished
adjusting the mirror. To adjust a mirror, select left or right
with the top switch, and press one of the four arrows for
the direction you want the mirror to move.
Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
Sideview Mirrors — If Equipped
The Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
side view mirrors are activated by pressing the
heated grid button, located on the Climate Control panel,
with the ignition On. Turning Off the rear window
defroster or the ignition will deactivate the Electric Rear
Window Defroster and Heated side view mirrors feature.
These features also turn off after activation, when 15
minutes have elapsed. To reactivate, simply press the
button again.
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
head to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or out-
board, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped Out or
In). A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main
mirror surface.
Power Mirror Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
3
NOTE: Fold the7x10inch trailer towing mirrors
rearward prior to entering an automated car wash.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to fold the7x10inch trailer towing
mirrors forward. The7x10inch trailer towing
mirrors are not designed to be folded forward and
doing so will damage the mirrors and/or vehicle.
Blindspot Mirror
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro-
phone for private conversation.
Trailer Towing Position
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
3
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Blue-
tooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UCon-
nect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system.
The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands-
Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UCon-
nect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
UConnect™ Switches
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can either be adjusted from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt
or another prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
example, you can either use the combined form voice
command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break
the combined form command into two voice com-
mands: ⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remem-
ber, the UConnect™ system works best when you talk
in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some
one sitting eight feet away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to
know what your options are at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙
following the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will
play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
NOTE:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ⬙Pair a
Phone.⬙
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number which
you will later need to enter into your cellular. You can
enter any four-digit pin number. You will not need to
remember this pin number after the initial pairing
process.
•
The UConnect™ system will then prompt you to begin
the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular
phone. Before attempting to pair phone, please see
your cellular phone’s user manual (Bluetooth section)
for instructions on how to complete this step.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
3
Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
•
System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
•
For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙ The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. The UConnect™ limits the user from
dialing invalid combination of numbers. For example,
234-567-890 is nine digits long, which is not a valid
phone number - the closest valid phone number has
ten digits.
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Call.⬙
•
System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone-
book. Refer to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recom-
mended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.:
⬙Home,⬙⬙Work,⬙⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
3
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be de-
leted. Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name and say ⬙Call.⬙ NOTE: the user can also exercise
⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ operations at this point.
•
The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
3
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The
UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today
do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either
answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ⬙Toggling Between Calls.⬙ To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call.⬙
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the ⬘Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has
been placed on hold. To bring the call back from hold,
press and hold the ⬘Phone’ button until you hear a single
beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recogni-
tion’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under ⬙Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ⬘Phone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
3
Redial
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ sys-
tem.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
•
After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
UConnect™ System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change op-
eration, only the language specific 32 name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
3
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon-
nect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-
528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-
age details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated tele-
phone system.
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice-
mail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound3746#,youcanpressthe’Voice Recognition’
button and say ⬙3746#Send.⬙ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g. the UConnect™ sys-
tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming net-
work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
3
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute-off.⬙
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number ⬙#121,⬙ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred to your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
ing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue-
tooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, follow the instruction
described in your cellular phone user’s manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone pairing”.
•
When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the ⬘Voice recognition’
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “de-
lete” a paired phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone.⬙
•
The phone names along with priority numbers will be
announced.
•
When prompted say the priority number of the cellu-
lar phone you wish to select. You can also press the
⬘Voice Recognition’ button anytime while the list is
being played, then say the priority number of the
phone that you wish to select.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UCon-
nect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete.⬙
•
The phone names along with priority numbers will be
announced.
•
When prompted say the priority number of the cellu-
lar phone you wish to delete. You can also press the
⬘Voice Recognition’ button anytime while the list is
being played and say the priority number of the phone
you wish to delete.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system, such
as, voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙send.⬙
•
Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
•
UConnect™ phonebook name tag recognition rate is
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
•
You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows, and
•
dry weather condition.
•
Operation from driver seat.
•
Performance, such as, audio clarity, echo. and loud-
ness to a large degree, rely on the phone and network,
and not the UConnect™ system.
•
Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to occasionally lose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this hap-
pens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recom-
mended to remain in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
3
North American English
Primary Alternate(s)
Zero Oh
Add location Add new
All All of them
Confirmation prompts Confirmations prompts
Delete a name Delete
Language Select language
List names List all
List paired phones List phones
Pager Beeper
Phone pairing Pairing
Phonebook Phone book
Return to main menu Return. Main menu
Select phone select
Set up Phone settings phone set
up
SEATS
The seating options available in this truck are the result of
extensive customer research and evaluations.
Seats are also a primary part of the Occupant Restraint
(protection) System of the vehicle. They need to be used
properly for safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
40-20-40 Front Seat
As the name implies, the seat is divided into 3 segments.
The outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total
width of the seat. The back of the center portion (20%)
easily folds down to provide an armrest/center storage
compartment (if equipped).
Each outboard seat is independently adjustable forward
or rearward and is equipped with a back recliner. The
manual forward or rearward seat adjustment handle is
found at the front edge of each seat cushion. Pull up on
the handle and slide the seat to get the most comfortable
position.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTER
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
3
Reclining Seats (1500 Standard and Quad Cab
Models)
The recliner handle is on the outside of the seat cushion.
Pull up on the handle, as shown, to release the seat back
and adjust for comfort.
WARNING!
You can be seriously, even fatally, injured riding in a
seat with the seatback reclined. Do not ride with the
seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no
longer resting against your chest. If you ride in this
position, the shoulder harness will no longer be
restraining you. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and receive serious or fatal injuries.
Recline in a seat only when the vehicle is parked.
Seat Recliner Handle
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Seats (2500/3500/Mega Cab Models)
The recliner handle is on the outside of the seat cushion.
Pull up on the handle, as shown, to release the seat back
and adjust for comfort.
WARNING!
You can be seriously, even fatally, injured riding in a
seat with the seatback reclined. Do not ride with the
seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no
longer resting against your chest. If you ride in this
position, the shoulder harness will no longer be
restraining you. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and receive serious or fatal injuries.
Recline in a seat only when the vehicle is parked.
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of neck injury in the
event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down on
the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical, at least to the level of the ears.
MANUAL RECLINE LEVER
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
3
To lower the head restraint, push in the button and then
push down on the head restraint.
Manual Rotary Lumbar Support Adjustment — If
Equipped
Rotating the lumbar control knob on the left side of the
driver’s seatback and on the right side of the passenger’s
seatback increases or decreases the lumbar (lower back)
support.
HEAD RESTRAINT & SPACERS
Manual Lumbar Adjustment
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats (1500 Standard and Quad Cab
Models) — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Don’t put anything under a power seat. It may cause
damage to the seat controls.
Power Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
3
The power seat controls are on the outboard side of the
front seat cushions. One switch controls the seat move-
ment. The six-way switch can be moved forward or
backwards to get the most comfortable position. The
same switch can be moved up and down to control seat
height or to change the seat angle by tilting it up or
down.
Power Seat Switch Position
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats (2500/3500/Mega Cab Models) — If
Equipped
CAUTION!
Don’t put anything under a power seat. It may cause
damage to the seat controls or the Occupant Classi-
fication System.
PS SW. LOCATOR
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
3
The power seat controls are on the outboard side of the
front seat cushions. Three switches control the seat move-
ment. The four-way switch in the center can be moved
forward or backwards to get the most comfortable posi-
tion. The same switch can be moved up and down to
control seat height. Change the seat angle by using the
two toggle switches, tilting it up or down.
Up, Down, Forward, and Rearward
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Features — Mega Cab Models
Reclining Rear Seats — Mega Cab Models
The recliner handle is on the outside of the seat cushion.
Pull up on the handle, as shown, to release the seat back
and adjust for comfort.
Folding Rear Seat (Table Mode) — Mega Cab
Models
Both the left and right rear seat backs can be folded down
and used as a table.
Tilt Adjustment Rear Seat Recliner Handle
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
3
To fold either rear seat back down (Table Mode), lift the
handle and fold the seat back forward. Simply lift the seat
back to return the seat to the upright position. Verify that
it is locked in place.
Table Mode Handle
Table Mode
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat (Kneel Mode) — Mega Cab
Models
Both the left and right rear seats can be folded flat (Kneel
Mode) and used for carrying cargo. Each of the rear seat
backs provide 2 D-rings and each of the rear storage bin
lids provide 2 slotted cutouts. Use a cargo tie down to
secure cargo in the cargo carrying area.
Securing Cargo
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured cargo can fly
around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the
vehicle, causing serious injury or possible death.
Secure cargo with a cargo tie down using the
D-Rings provided on the back of the seats and the
slotted cutouts in the rear storage bin lid.
NOTE: The rear seat will drop and move forward in
Kneel Mode.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To fold either rear seat flat (Kneel Mode), lift the handle
and fold the seat forward. Simply lift the seat back to
return the seat to the upright position. Verify that it is
locked in place.
Kneel Mode Handle
Kneel Mode
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
3
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heated seat switches are located in the instrument
panel under the climate controls.
Heated Seat Switches
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Each heated seat switch has two settings (HI and LOW).
Press the switch once to obtain High heat level, then
press the switch again to obtain Low heat level. Pressing
the switch a third time will turn the heated seats OFF. If
you do not purposefully turn the switch OFF, the seat
heating level will automatically change to the next lower
level, or OFF. The High heat level operates for 30 minutes
(approximate), the Low heat level operates for 30 min-
utes (approximate). The seat heat will also turn OFF
when the ignition is turned OFF. Both of the indicators
ON identifies High heat level. The lower indicator On
only, identifies Low heat level. Flashing indicator lights
on the switch indicate that the Heated Seat System needs
servicing.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
3
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at
the base of the instrument panel. Once the hood is
released you must reach into the opening beneath the
center of the grille and push up the latch to release the
safety catch before raising the hood.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Hood Release Lever
Secondary Latch
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are latched fully before
driving.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the
upward detent position, or if equipped, when the UN-
LOCK button is pressed on the key fob.When a door is
open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer
control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all
the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the
⬙Party⬙ mode because it allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging the vehi-
cle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are ON you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
“Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are re-
quired during the day.
Club Cab/Quad Cab models may have an optional
switched dome lamp that may be operated by pressing
the lens.
Dimmer Control
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, Load Shed-
ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 10
minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlamps remain on while the ignition is cycled
off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after 8
minutes. If the headlamps are turned on and left on for 8
minutes while the ignition is off, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
Headlamp Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlamp delay that will leave the headlamps on for 90
seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is
turned OFF while the headlamp switch is on, and then
the headlamp switch is cycled off. Headlamp delay can
be cancelled by either turning the headlamp switch ON
then OFF or by turning the ignition ON.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
3
Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights
When the headlight switch is rotated to the first
position, the parking lights, taillights, side marker
lights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are all turned on. The headlights will turn ON
when the switch is rotated to the second position.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses
that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only and Fleet
Vehicles)
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started. This provides a constant ⬙Lights ON⬙
condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights
Light Switch Rotation
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
illuminate at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the
parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights
will turn off.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left
on, after the ignition is turned off, a chime will sound
when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The foglights are turned ON by placing the head-
light rotary control in the parking light or head-
light position and pushing in the headlight rotary
control. The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are ON or when the vehicle headlights are ON low
beam. An indicator light located in the instrument cluster
will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights
will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time,
when the headlight switch is rotated to the OFF position,
or the high beam is selected.
CARGO Light — If Equipped
The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the
CARGO button. The interior lights will also turn on
when the cargo lights are on. The cargo lights will also
turn on for 30 seconds when a key fob Unlock is pressed,
as part of the illuminated entry feature.
Cargo Light Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
3
MULTIFUNCTION CONTROL LEVER
The multifunction control lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the lever up or down to signal a right-hand or
left-hand turn.
The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes
to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation
of the front and rear turn signal lights. If a defective bulb
or wiring circuit is detected for the turn signal system, the
arrow indicators will flash at a faster rate. If an indicator
fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest
that the switch or indicator lamp is defective.
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down.
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
Turn Signal Lever
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch
Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or
LOW beam.
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction control lever. Turn the end of the handle to
select the desired wiper speed.
High Beam / Low Beam
Windshield Wiper / Washer Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
3
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the LOW continual speed position. The delay
can be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every 2 seconds. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km) or less.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push in on the washer knob on the end
of the multifunction control lever and hold while spray is
desired. If the washer knob is depressed while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds
after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer
knob is pushed, for a period greater than 1 second, while
in the OFF position, the wiper will wipe approximately
three wipes, after the wash knob is released.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the column, pull rearward on the lever below the
turn signal control and move the wheel up or down, as
desired. Push the lever forward to lock the column firmly
in place.
Tilt Steering Control Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
3
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The power adjustable accelerator and brake pedals allow
the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to
the steering wheel and pedals.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustment
1. Position the driver seat so that you are at least 10
inches (254 mm) away from the airbag located in the
center of the steering wheel.
2. Fasten and adjust the seatbelts.
3. Move the adjustable pedal switch, located to the left of
the steering column near the parking brake release, in the
direction you desire to move the pedals.
4. The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
R (Reverse) or when the Speed Control is SET.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become
limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in
the adjustable pedal’s path.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
3
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over accelerator opera-
tion at speeds greater than (refer to the table below for
the speed for your specific engine). The controls are
mounted on the steering wheel.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. In the
instrument cluster, the word “CRUISE” illuminates when
the system is on.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, clutch
pressure while slowing the vehicle, or pressing the CAN-
CEL button will deactivate speed control without erasing
the memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to the OFF
position or turning off the ignition erases the memory.
Speed Control Switches
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system to
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the
system OFF when you aren’t using it.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above
(refer to the table below for the speed for your specific
engine).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the speed control is on, speed can be increased by
pressing and holding the ACCEL button. When the
button is released, a new set speed will be established.
Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed
increase (refer to the table below for the speed for your
specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed
increases so that tapping the button three times will
increase speed by three increments.
Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed
decrease (refer to the table below for the speed for your
specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed
will decrease. For example, tapping the button 3 times
will decrease the speed by 3 times the speed listed in the
table below (refer to the table below for the speed for
your specific engine).
To decrease speed while the speed control is on, press
and hold the DECEL button. Release the button when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
3
Functions 3.7L 4.7L 5.7L
Engage Speed 35 mph (56 km/h) 35 mph (56 km/h) 25 mph (40 km/h)
Minimun RESUME Speed 30 mph (50 km/h) 30 mph (50 km/h) 20 mph (32 km/h)
ACCEL Increase 2 mph (3km/h) 2 mph (3km/h) 1 mph (2 km/h)
DECEL Decrease 1 mph (2 km/h) 1 mph (2 km/h) 1 mph (2 km/h)
Dropout Speed 30 mph (50 km/h) 30 mph (50 km/h) 20 mph (32 km/h)
To Accelerate For Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000
feet (610 meters), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded
(especially when towing) the vehicle may slow below the
SET speed. If the vehicle speed drops below (refer to the
table below for the speed for your specific engine), the
speed control will automatically disengage. If this hap-
pens, you can push down on the accelerator pedal to
maintain the desired speed.
Vehicles equipped with a 5–speed-manual transmission
should be operated in 4th gear or lower under the above
conditions.
Vehicles equipped with a Automatic transmission may
exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions.
To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to im-
prove vehicle performance, it is advisable to use either
TOW HAUL or O/D OFF modes which can be selected
by pressing the “TOW HAUL O/D OFF” button located
at the end of the gear shifter.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE— IF EQUIPPED
The two optional overhead consoles may consist of the
following features:
•
Courtesy/Reading Lights
•
Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC)
— If Equipped
•
Universal Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
Overhead Console Features
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
3
Courtesy/Reading Lights
In the middle of the console are two courtesy/reading
lights.
Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is
opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (fully upward position), or when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry transmitter, if so equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing the
recessed area of the corresponding lens.
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the vehicle is turned off, they will
extinguish after 15 minutes.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER
— IF EQUIPPED
This optional overhead console consists of the following:
•
Courtesy Lights
•
Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC)
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
This overhead console allows you to choose between a
compass/temperature display and one of four trip con-
ditions being monitored.
US/M Button
Use this button to change the display from U.S. to metric
measurement units.
RESET Button
Use this button to reset the following displays:
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
Trip Odometer (ODO)
Elapsed time (ET)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
3
Global Reset
If the RESET button is pressed twice within 2 seconds
while in any of the 3 resettable displays (AVG ECO,
ODO, ET), the Global Reset will reset all 3 displays.
Step Button
Use this button to choose or cycle through the four trip
conditions.
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Average fuel economy is a running average of the
amount of fuel used and the distance the vehicle has
traveled.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will momen-
tarily blank. Then, the history information will be erased,
and the averaging will continue from where it was before
the reset. The reset value is based on a minimal amount
of fuel used and the distance traveled from the previous
drive cycle. The display may take several miles for this
value to change dependent upon driving habits.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. This is not resettable
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated
driving distance, the DTE display will change to an
alternating test display of “LO” and “FUEL”. This dis-
play will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel.
Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will
turn off the “LO FUEL” text and a new DTE value will be
displayed, based on the current values in the DTE
calculation and the current fuel tank level.
NOTE: It is possible for DTE to display “LO FUEL”
before the low fuel warning light turns on in the instru-
ment cluster. This could occur because low fuel warning
is set to a specified fuel tank volume and DTE is an
estimated distance calculation based on fuel economy
and remaining fuel tank volume.
Ram fuel tank volumes are as follows:
•
26 gallons - 1500 short box models
•
34 gallons - 1500 Quad Cab (if equipped)/2500/3500
short box models
•
35 gallons - 1500/2500/3500 long box models
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Resetting of this screen will cause the trip odometer
to change to Zero.
Elapsed Time (ET)
This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time
since the last reset. Resetting the Elapsed Time will cause
the display to change to Zero.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
3
C/T Button
Use this button to select a readout of the outside tem-
perature and one of eight compass headings that indicate
the direction in which the vehicle is facing.
WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above
32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible per-
sonal injury or property damage.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the CAL
symbol will be displayed.
After completing up to three 360° turns, with the vehicle
traveling less than 5 mph (8 km/h), in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects, the CAL symbol will turn
off and the compass will function normally.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Compass Calibration
NOTE: To ensure proper compass calibration, make
sure the compass variance is properly set before manu-
ally calibrating the compass.
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does
not appear, you must manually put the compass into the
“Calibration” mode.
Recalibrating The Compass
Turn on the ignition and set the display to “Compass/
Temperature.” Press and hold the RESET button to
change the display between VAR (compass variance) and
CAL (compass calibration) modes. When the CAL sym-
bol is displayed complete one 360° turn in an area free
from large metal objects or power lines. The CAL symbol
will turn off and the compass will function normally.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
3
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
north and geographic north. In some areas of the country,
the difference between magnetic and geographic north is
great enough to cause the compass to give false readings.
If this occurs, the compass variance must be set according
to the Compass Variance Map.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The default for the compass variance is zone 8.
To set the variance: Turn the ignition ON and set the
display to “Compass/Temperature.” Press and hold the
RESET button approximately five seconds. The last vari-
ance zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP
button to select the new variance zone and press the
RESET button to resume normal operation.
Outside Temperature
Because the ambient temperature sensor is located un-
derhood, engine temperature can influence the displayed
temperature, therefore, temperature readings are slowly
updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (30
km/h) or during stop and go driving.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver replaces up to three
remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate de-
vices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, or
home lighting. It triggers these devices at the push of a
button. The Universal Transceiver operates off your vehi-
cle’s battery and charging system; no batteries are needed.
HomeLink威 Programming Buttons
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
3
For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
WARNING!
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener mod-
els manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming HomeLink
NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside the garage. It is also recom-
mended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to
HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and
release only when the indicator light begins to flash (after
20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30
seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two
HomeLink buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3
inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
Outer HomeLink buttons
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
3
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink
button that you want to train and the hand-held trans-
mitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with
procedures noted in the ⬙Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-
gramming⬙ section.
4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from the
slow to the rapid flash.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete and your device
should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed
and released.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but-
tons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
step one.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
then turns to a constant light, continue with ⴖProgram-
mingⴖ steps 6-8 to complete the programming of a rolling
code equipped device (most commonly a garage door
opener).
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
in the garage, locate the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button.
(The name and color of the button may vary by manu-
facturer.)
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step
eight.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button.
Repeat the ⴖpress/hold/releaseⴖ sequence a second time,
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but-
tons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
step one. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to ⬙time-out⬙ (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to ⬙time-out⬙ in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the ⬙Program-
ming⬙ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
ⴖProgramming HomeLinkⴖ step 3 with the following:
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
⬙cycling⬙ process to prevent possible overheating.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release every two seconds (⬙cycle⬙)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
successfully been accepted by HomeLink. (The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly.) Proceed with
⬙Programming⬙ step four to complete.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
3
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the event that
there are still programming difficulties or questions,
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-
3515.
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual
buttons cannot be erased but can be ⬙reprogrammed⬙ -
note below), follow the step noted:
•
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.
Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30
seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning)
mode and can be programmed at any time beginning
with ⬙Programming⬙ - step 2.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds.
Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with
⬙Programming⬙ step 2
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold
down both outside buttons until the green light begins to
flash.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
3
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Open Sunroof - Express Mode
Momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate
the Express Open Feature, causing the sunroof to open
automatically. During the Express Open operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will
remain in a partial open position. Again, momentarily
pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express
Open Feature.
Comfort Stop
The sunroof is equipped with an intermediate “Comfort
Stop” position. This is the first stop that express open
reaches. This is designed to reduce wind buffeting at
vehicle speeds between 20 - 40 mph (32 - 64 km/h).
Pressing the switch momentarily rearward again will
open the sunroof to its full open position however wind
buffeting can occur at full open.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, and
will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express
Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
3
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary electrical outlet can provide power for in
cab accessories designed for use with the standard “cigar
lighter” plug. The outlet is located in the instrument
panel below and to the right of the Climate Control
Panel. A cap is attached to the outlet base indicating
“Power Outlet” 12V-20A.
There is an additional Power Outlet inside the center
console of vehicles equipped with 40/20/40, or Bucket
front seats. There is also a Power Outlet located on the
rear of the center console for Quad Cab or Mega Cab
vehicles (only) equipped with bucket seats.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The outlet(s) has/have a fused direct feed from the
battery so it/they receive power whether the ignition is
ON or OFF.
All accessories connected to this/these outlet(s) should
be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use
to protect the battery against discharge.
NOTE: If desired, all of the power outlets can be
converted by your authorized dealer to provide power
with the ignition switch in the ON position only.
CAUTION!
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
3
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER
The removable ash receiver is located in the instrument
panel cup holder tray.
The cigar lighter is located on the instrument panel,
above and to the left of the ash receiver.
As a child safety precaution, the lighter only operates
with the ignition switch ON. It heats when pushed in and
pops out automatically when ready for use. To preserve
the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the
heating position.
Ash Tray Automatic Transmission
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders (40–20–40
Seats) — Automatic Transmission
Your new Ram truck is equipped with two adjustable
cupholders. The cupholder is opened by pulling on the
cup holder door handle, on the front surface. Each
opening in the cupholder is adjustable and will hold cups
and mugs of various sizes.
Ash Tray Manual Transmission
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
3
To secure the cup, place the cup to be held into one of the
cup wells and then push the cupholder arm toward the
cup until it is held stable.
Cup Holder Door Handle
Cup Holders Automatic Transmission
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders (Bucket
Seats) — Automatic Transmission
If your new Ram truck is equipped with bucket seats
there are three cup holders located on the front of the
center console.
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Manual
Transmission
Cup Holders Bucket Seat
Cup Holders Manual Transmission
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
3
Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab — If Equipped
Quad Cab vehicles may be equipped with a rear cup-
holder that consists of two cupwells for rear passenger
convenience.
Rear Cupholder — Mega Cab
Mega Cab vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders
located in the center armrest.
Mega Cab Rear Armrest Cup Holder
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Center Storage Compartment (40–20–40 Seat) —
If Equipped
The center portion of the seat folds down to provide an
armrest with unique storage compartments under the lid.
Push the button on the front of the armrest to raise the
cover. Inside there is a power outlet (if equipped),
removable coin holder (if equipped), and two dividers to
configure the storage area into compartments. For ex-
ample, compartments can be configured to hold a lap-top
computer, a cellular telephone, CD’s and miscellaneous
items. The top of the cover provides a generous firm
surface to serve as a desktop for your “mobile office.”
WARNING!
•
This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or an accident. Only use the center
seating position when the armrest is fully upright.
•
In an accident, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs
(4.5 kg). These items could be thrown about
endangering occupants of the vehicle. Items
stored should not exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
3
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Center Storage Compartment (Bucket Seats)— If
Equipped
Push the upper button on the front of the armrest to raise
the upper cover. Inside is a power outlet (if equipped), a
cut out for a cell phone charger cord, removable coin
holder (if equipped), and a divider to configure the
Center Storage Compartment
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
storage area into separate compartments. Lift the lower
handle on the front of the armrest, and raise the armrest
for access to the lower storage bin. On Quad Cab and
Mega Cab models the rear of the floor console offers a
power outlet, a tip out bin and a rear air duct (Mega Cab
Only).
WARNING!
•
This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or an accident. Only use the center
seating position when the armrest is fully upright.
•
In an accident, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs
(4.5 kg). These items could be thrown about
endangering occupants of the vehicle. Items
stored should not exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
3
Storage and Seats (Quad Cab Models)
Located in the center of the front 40/20/40 seat cushion
there is a storage compartment.
Standard cab models also have storage behind the seat.
The Quad Cab models provide additional storage under
the rear seat. Lift the seat to access the storage compart-
ment.
Storage and Seats (Mega Cab Models)
The Mega Cab models provide additional storage behind
the rear seat.
Quad Cab Storage
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To gain access to the Mega Cab rear storage, fold the rear
seats to the “kneel position”. (See page 155 for more
information.)
Push down on the front of the storage compartment
handle and lift the storage compartment cover.
The rear storage compartment can be divided into three
separate compartments by using the divider doors inside
the storage compartment.
Mega Cab Rear Storage Compartment Handle
Mega Cab Rear Storage Dividers
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
3
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Mega Cab
Models)
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the back panel of the cab, behind
the rear seat.
FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED
Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped
Quad Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat, may be
equipped with a folding load floor.
Mega Cab Grocery Bag Hooks
Quad Cab Rear 60/40 Seat
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on
the load floor. While driving or in an accident you
may experience, abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration,
or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor
may move around with force and strike occupants,
resulting in serious or fatal injury.
Unfolding the Load Floor
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
Unfolding The Load Floor
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
3
2. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until
the load floor unfolds into position.
3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Positioning the Load Floor for Storage Access Under
the Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the
load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load
floor.
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up position.
When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor
could move to the down position causing serious
injury.
Load Floor In Open Position
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the
secured down position before you operate the vehicle.
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box on your new Ram has many features
designed for utility and convenience.
NOTE: If you are installing a toolbox to the front of the
pickup box, you must use Mopar威 toolbox brackets
available from your dealer.
Load Floor Securing Straps
Pickup Box Features
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
3
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of ply-
wood, etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumber
across the box in the indentations provided above the
wheel housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the
floor.
WARNING!
The pickup box is intended for load carrying pur-
poses only, not for passengers, who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
WARNING!
•
Care should always be exercised when operating a
vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle speeds may
need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may
cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may
result in vehicle damage. If wide building materials
are to be frequently carried, the installation of a
support is recommended. This will restrain the
cargo and transfer the load to the pickup box floor.
•
If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of
material suspended above the wheelhouse, sup-
ports must be installed to transfer the weight of
the load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage
may result. The use of proper supports will permit
loading up to the rated payload.
•
Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an
accident causing serious or fatal injury.
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side
bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel
housings. Place wooden boards across the box from side
to side to create separate load compartments in the
pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of
the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs (450
kg) total.
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
Camper Applications
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
refer to the “Consumer Information Truck-Camper Load-
ing” document available from your dealer. For safety
reasons, follow all instructions in this important docu-
ment.
NOTE: When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a
vehicle, an alternate CHMSL (Center High Mounted Stop
Light) must be provided.
EASY-OFF TAILGATE
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed quickly. If the truck is a 3500
dual rear wheel model, unplug the tailgate wire harness
from under the rear of the truck and pull the harness out
of the cargo box access hole. Unlatch the tailgate and
remove the support cables by releasing the lock tang
from the pivot, then rotate and pull away from the box.
Once the cables are free, move to the right side of the
tailgate hinge bracket.
Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side
pivot clears the hanger bracket. Slide the entire tailgate to
the right to free the left side pivot. Remove the tailgate
from the vehicle entirely. Do not carry the tailgate loose in
the truck pickup box.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
3
NOTE: Dual rear wheel pickup models require properly
spaced rear clearance lights. If such a vehicle is operated
without a tailgate, suitable lights must be installed.
Tailgate Support Cables
Lock Tang And Pivot
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly,
the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap
or Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the
overhanging camper compartment and be free of
leaks.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instruments And Controls .................217
䡵 Instrument Cluster ......................218
䡵 Instrument Cluster Description .............219
䡵 Electronic Digital Clock ..................227
▫ Clock Setting Procedure.................227
䡵 Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands
Free Phone Capability ...................228
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......228
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode .........232
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .....234
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone —
If Equipped .........................235
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio —
If Equipped .........................236
䡵 Sales Code RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-Disc) Radio
With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free Phone,
And Vehicle Entertainment Systems (VES)
Capabilities ...........................236
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......236
4
▫ Operation Instructions -
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) ...........242
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) ...........243
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............245
▫ Operation Instructions -
(CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play) ..........248
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . 248
䡵 Sales Code RAK – AM/FM/Cassette/CD (6-Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free
Phone, Video, MP3, And WMA Capabilities ....250
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......251
▫ Operating Instructions — Tape Player .......255
▫ Seek Button .........................255
▫ Fast Forward (FF) .....................255
▫ Rewind (RW) ........................256
▫ Tape Eject ...........................256
▫ Scan Button .........................256
▫ Changing Tape Direction ................256
▫ Metal Tape Selection ...................256
▫ Pinch Roller Release ...................256
▫ Noise Reduction ......................256
▫ Operation Instructions -
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) ...........257
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) ...........258
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............260
▫ Operation Instructions -
(CD Mode For MP3 And WMA Audio Play) . . 262
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For MP3 And WMA Play) .......262
䡵 Sales Code REC — AM/FM/CD (6–Disc)
Radio With Navigation System .............265
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
(If Equipped) ........................265
▫ Clock Setting Procedure.................265
䡵 Video Entertainment System (Sales Code XRV) —
If Equipped ...........................266
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped ..............266
▫ System Activation .....................266
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID) ....................267
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF, RAQ, And
RAK Radios .........................268
▫ Selecting a Channel ....................268
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels ......269
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button
(If Equipped) ........................269
▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ .....................269
▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ .....................269
▫ Satellite Antenna ......................269
▫ Reception Quality .....................270
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . . 270
▫ Radio Operation ......................271
▫ Tape Player .........................271
▫ CD Player ..........................271
䡵 Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance .......272
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
4
䡵 Compact Disc Maintenance ................273
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ........273
䡵 Climate Controls .......................274
▫ Heater Only — Fleet Vehicles .............274
▫ Air Conditioning And Heating —
If Equipped .........................277
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster And Heated
Sideview Mirrors — If Equipped ..........280
▫ Air Conditioning With Dual Zone Temperature
Control — If Equipped .................280
▫ Operating Tips .......................285
▫ Operating Tips Chart ...................287
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
1. Check Gages
This light illuminates when the Voltmeter, Engine
Oil Pressure or Engine Coolant Temperature
gages indicate a reading either too high or too low.
Examine the gages carefully, and follow the instructions
above for each indicated problem.
NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned to OFF, the
Fuel Gage, Voltmeter, Oil Pressure and Engine Coolant
Temperature gages may not show accurate readings.
When the engine is not running, turn the ignition switch
to ON to obtain accurate readings.
2. Voltage Gauge
When the engine is running, the gauge indicates
the electrical system voltage. The pointer should
stay within the normal range if the battery is charged. If
the pointer moves to either extreme left or right and
remains there during normal driving, the electrical sys-
tem should be serviced.
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of
the gauge, the “Check Gages” indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound. The “Check Gages”
indicator may also illuminate prior to the voltage gauge
moving out of normal range. In either case, see you local
authorized Dealer for system service.
3. Turn Signal Indicators
Lights in instrument cluster flash when outside turn
signals are operating. (See page 166 for more informa-
tion.)
4. Tachometer
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per
minute.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
4
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer at high rpm for extended periods. Engine
damage may occur.
5. Airbag Indicator Light
The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 seconds
when the ignition is first turned on. If the light stays on,
flickers or comes on while driving, have the airbag
system checked by an authorized dealer.
6. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that headlights are on high
beam.
7. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check.
During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or
when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled,
the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on
continuously. Refer to ⬙Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Re-
minder System (BeltAlert™)⬙ in the Occupant Restraints
section for more information. (See page 30 for more
information.)
8. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour and/or kilometers per hour.
9. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate some oil pres-
sure when the engine is running. A continuous
high or low reading, under normal driving conditions,
may indicate a lubrication system malfunction. Immedi-
ate service should be obtained. (See page 431 for more
information.)
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of
the gauge, the “Check Gages” indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound.
10. Transfer Case Position
(See page 308 for more information.)
11. TOW HAUL
The TOW HAUL button is located at the end of the gear
shift lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW
HAUL OD/OFF button is pushed once. (See page 303 for
more information.)
12. OD/OFF
the OD/OFF button is located at the end of the gear shift
lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL
OD/OFF button is pushed twice. (See page 303 for more
information.)
13. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the cooling system is operat-
ing satisfactorily. The gauge needle will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, in heavy traffic, or when towing a
trailer. If the needle rises to the “245°F” mark, stop the
vehicle, shift into N (Neutral), and increase the engine
idle speed for 2 to 3 minutes. If the temperature reading
does not return to normal, shut your engine OFF and
allow it to cool. Seek authorized service immediately. See
Cooling System information in the section on “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
4
CAUTION!
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the
engine running as you would not be able to react to
the temperature indicator if the engine overheats.
NOTE: Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
1000 rpm at elevated coolant temperatures to improve
engine cooling.
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of
the gauge, the “Check Gages” indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound.
14. Security Light
The light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds
when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will
flash at a slower rate after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about two seconds when the
ignition is first turned ON.
15. Transmission Range Indicator (Automatic
Transmissions Only)
When the gear selector lever is moved, this indicator
shows the automatic transmission gear range selected.
16. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
If the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To
toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer,
press the Odometer/Trip Odometer Button. To reset the
Trip Odometer, press and hold the button while in trip
mode, until the Trip Odometer resets.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluores-
cent Display will also may display GASCAP, which
indicates that your gas cap is possibly loose or damaged.
(See page 361 for more information.)
The Vacuum Fluorescent Display will also display NO-
FUSE, which indicates that the IOD fuse is removed from
the Integrated Power Module. (See page 469 for more
information.)
NOTE: There is also an engine hour function. This
indicates the total number of hours the engine has been
running. To display the engine hours perform the follow-
ing: Place the ignition in RUN, but do not start the
engine. With the odometer value displayed, hold the trip
button down for a period of 6 seconds. The odometer will
change to trip value first, then it will display the engine
hour value. The engine hours will be displayed for a
period of 30 seconds until the ignition is turned off or the
engine is started.
17. Check Gages Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
which monitors the emissions and engine control
system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the
engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5
seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If the
bulb does not come on during starting, have the condi-
tion investigated promptly.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
4
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
18. Brake System Warning Light
This light illuminates when the ignition key is turned to
the ON position and remains on for a few seconds. If the
light stays on longer, it may be an indication that the
parking brake has not been released. This light will
illuminate if the brake fluid is low, especially when
braking or accelerating hard. This light will illuminate if
the ABS indicator light has a malfunction. This light will
flash if the engine is running and the parking brake is on.
If the light remains on when the parking brake is
released, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction. In this case, the light will remain on until
the cause is corrected.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary
and continued operation of the vehicle in this condition is
dangerous.
Acceleration which causes the rear wheels to slip for a
period of time may result in the red brake light illumi-
nating and a brake switch code being set on ABS
equipped vehicles. Depressing the brake pedal should
extinguish the red brake light.
19. ABS Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
which is described elsewhere in this manual. This
light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the
ON position and may stay on for five seconds. If the ABS
light remains on or comes on during driving, it indicates
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required. See your autho-
rized dealer immediately. The ABS light could also
illuminate during loss of traction and remain illuminated
until the brake pedal is pressed.
20. Cargo Light
The Cargo Lamp light will illuminate when the Cargo
Lamp is activated by pressing the Cargo Light Button on
the headlight switch.
21. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a prob-
lem is detected the light will come on while the
engine is running. If the light remains lit with
the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable,
however, see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain
on for 15 seconds as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
22. SERV 4WD Indicator
The 4WD indicator will be illuminated whenever the
4WD mode is engaged for either the manual or electric
shift 4WD systems. The SERV 4WD indicator monitors
the electric shift 4WD system. If the SERV 4WD light
stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the
4WD system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
23. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows when the front fog lights are ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
4
24. Low Washer Fluid Light
This light comes on when the washer fluid level falls
below approximately 1/4 full. The light will remain on
until fluid is added and ignition switch is cycled.
25. Transmission Oil Temperature Warning Light
(Automatic Transmissions Only)
This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
mission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
operation (e.g. snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
light goes off.
26. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button
Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the
trip odometer display. Holding the button in resets the
trip odometer reading when in trip mode.
27. Fuel Gauge
Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the
ON position.
28. Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level drops to 1/16 tank, the fuel
symbol will light and a single chime will sound.
(See page 178 for more information.)
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with an overhead
console module (CMTC), it is possible for DTE to display
“LO FUEL” before the low fuel warning light turns on in
the instrument cluster. This could occur because the low
fuel warning is set to a specified fuel tank volume and
DTE is an estimated distance calculation based on vehicle
fuel economy and remaining fuel tank volume.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Ram fuel tank volumes are as follows:
•
26 gallons - 1500 short box models
•
34 gallons - 1500/2500/3500 short box models
•
35 gallons - 1500/2500/3500 long box models
29. Door Ajar
The Door Ajar light will illuminate when any
door is opened. When the ignition is ON the
Door Ajar light will stay illuminated until the
open door is closed. When the ignition is OFF
the Door Ajar light will stay illuminated until the open
door is closed or the battery saver feature automatically
turns the light off.
30. CRUISE Light
This indicator lights when the electronic speed control
system is turned on.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or
time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio
model) whenever the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, or
when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keep-
ing is accurately maintained.
On the RAQ radio the time button alternates the location
of the time and frequency on the display. On the REF only
one of the two, time or frequency is displayed at a time.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
4
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait approximately
5 seconds.
SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND
HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
REF Radio
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player or Satellite Radio (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will
cancel the MUTE feature.
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
4
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the PSCAN button, causes the tuner to scan
through preset stations, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
search, press PSCAN a second time.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will be dis-
played. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the right or
left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will
be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
4
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12 FM and
12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into push-
button memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can
be selected by pressing the push-button twice.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
Preset Buttons1-6(Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Operation Instructions - CD Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
NOTE:
•
On some vehicles you may insert or eject a disc with
the radio or ignition switch OFF.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
•
This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control or turning OFF
the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
TIME Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day. The time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
4
RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD
Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, cassette player or microphone and utilize the
vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.
The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical
device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3.5
mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases
the MODE button until AUX appears on the display.
NOTE: The radio will return to the last stored mode if
the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK posi-
tion to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
radio was previously in the AUX mode.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control or turning OFF
the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Mode Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player or Satellite Radio (if equipped).
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to the HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™) section
of the Owner’s Manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
4
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO
WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDS
FREE PHONE, AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS (VES) CAPABILITIES
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
RAQ Radio
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Satellite Radio, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
4
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
MSG or INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station (one
with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio
Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode
only).
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL-
ANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or
left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side
speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance and fade.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button or
turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will
allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
4
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
16 Digit-Character Dis-
play
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adult_Hits
Alert Alert Alert Alert
Classical Classical
Classic Rock Classic_Rock
College College
Country Country
Emergency Test Emergency Test
Foreign Language Foreign_Language
Information Information
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalgia
Oldies Oldies
Personality Personality
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues
Religious Music Religious_Music
Religious Talk Religious_Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft_Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft_R_&_B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top_40
Weather Weather
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
SET/DIR Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET/DIR
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET/DIR
button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12
FM and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
Buttons1-6(Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
4
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
Play)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
LOAD / EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
4
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 10 seconds. If no discs are inserted
within 10 seconds “NO DISCS LOADED” will be dis-
played.
On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and
ignition OFF.
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Buttons1-6(CDMODE for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions1-6forPlay/Load/Eject.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 15
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
4
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
4
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 Audio
Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays
the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within
the first ten seconds plays the previous file.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading.
LOAD / EJECT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MSG or INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
able).
Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to
⬙elapsed time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the
message display priority mode or elapsed time display
priority mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
4
Buttons1-6(CDMode for MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions1-6forPlay/Load/Eject.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES威) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES威)
Guide.
SALES CODE RAK – AM/FM/CASSETTE/CD
(6-DISC) RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE
RADIO, HANDS FREE PHONE, VIDEO, MP3, and
WMA CAPABILITIES
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
RAK Radio
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Cassette, Satellite, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if equipped) mode.
Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left
side to seek down. The radio will remained tuned to the
new station until you make another selection. Holding
the button and will bypass stations without stopping
until you release it.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds (satellite
scan 8 seconds) at each listenable station before continu-
ing to the next. To stop the search, press SCAN a second
time.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
4
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the INFO button for an RBDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast (if available) from an FM station (FM
mode only).
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease
the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance and fade.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Turning the tune knob
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broad-
cast PTY information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
4
Turn the tune knob to select the following format types:
Program Type 16 Digit-Character Display
No program type or
undefined
None
News News
Information Information
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Rock Rock
Classic Rock Classic_Rock
Adult Hits Adult_Hits
Soft Rock Soft_Rock
Top 40 Top_40
Country Country
Oldies Oldies
Soft Soft
Nostalgia Nostalgia
Jazz Jazz
Classical Classical
Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues
Soft Rhythm and
Blues
Soft_R_&_B
Foreign Language Foreign_Language
Religious Music Religious_Music
Religious Talk Religious_Talk
Personality Personality
Public Public
College College
Unassigned
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
NOTE: If you have selected a PTY with the tune knob,
simply pressing the tune button in will go directly to a
“PTY seek”.
Buttons1-6(Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Operating Instructions — Tape Player
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
left and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
Fast Forward (FF)
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
opposite direction.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
4
Rewind (RW)
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.
Tape Eject
Press this button and the cassette will disen-
gage and eject from the radio.
Scan Button
Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.
Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.
Changing Tape Direction
If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side
being played), press Preset 6. The lighted arrow in the
display window will show the new direction.
Metal Tape Selection
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the
player will automatically select the correct equalization.
Pinch Roller Release
If ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch are turned
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
Noise Reduction
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the
tape player is on, but may be switched off.
To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press
Preset 1 after you insert the tape. The NR light in the
display will go off when the Dolby System is off.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
* ”Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-
ratories Licensing Corporation.
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
Play)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks
and WMA.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
4
SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
LOAD/EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙INSERT DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
LOAD/EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the LOAD/EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
NOTE: MP3 and WMA Random Play are for file folders
only.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
4
Buttons1-6(CDMODE for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions1-6forPlay/Load/Eject.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 15
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
4
Playback of MP3 and WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 and WMA files may
be affected by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 and
WMA Audio Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
file. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the
beginning of the file. Pressing the button within the first
ten seconds plays the previous file.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA
Play)
LOAD/EJT - Load
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙INSERT DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the
disc is loading.
LOAD/EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and INFO button while playing MP3 or WMA disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
able).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button while in the message
display priority mode or elapsed time display priority
mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the file or MP3 and WMA selection.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
4
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND/PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
Buttons1-6(CDMode for MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions1-6forPlay/Load/Eject.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Phone” in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)
Guide.”
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE REC — AM/FM/CD (6–DISC) RADIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3
Capability (REC) - combines a Global-Positioning
System-based navigation system with an integrated color
screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection
menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destina-
tions and routes, AM/FM stereo radio and six-disc CD
changer with MP3 capability.
Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a
DVD that is loaded into the unit. One map DVD covers
all of North America. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
Clock Setting Procedure
Refer to “Setting the Clock” under ”System Settings” in
your Navigation User’s Manual for details about setting
the clock.
REC Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
4
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (SALES CODE
XRV) — IF EQUIPPED
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) con-
sists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display)
screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two head-
sets. The system is located in the headliner behind the
front row seat. Refer to your VES™ User’s Manual for
detailed operating instructions.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-
lite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
System Activation
NOTE: Your vehicle’s radio must be on and in satellite
mode when the activation process takes place.
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following informa-
tion available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access With REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
twelve-digit ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press
the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits.
Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve
ESN/SID digits have been displayed. The SEEK DOWN
will page down until the first four digits are displayed.
The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other
button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes
has passed since any button was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With RAQ and RAK Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID num-
bers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With REC Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.
With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the
radio off, press the CD Eject and Set buttons simulta-
neously until the 12 digits of the ESN/SID appear on the
screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
4
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, RAQ, and RAK
Radios
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ and RAK Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information such as song
title and artist press the MSG or INFO button.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539-
7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock-
ing. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the ⬙SCAN⬙
button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button while
performing a music type scan will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ
When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
4
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Remote Sound System Controls
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume. The center button of the
right hand control will allow you to change the mode.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the left side switch will SEEK up for
the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the
switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
Tape Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
selection on the cassette. Pressing the bottom of the
switch once will go to the beginning of the current
selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it
is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second selection, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
4
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
take the following precautions:
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin-
ished.
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from
slackness and dust when it is not in use.
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
adhering flatly to the cassette.
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
WET cleaning cassette.
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged, oversized, or have theft
protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the operation of a cellular
phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy perfor-
mance from your radio. This condition may be lessened
or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna.
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repo-
sitioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio
volume be turned down or off during cellular phone
operation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
4
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The controls for the heating and ventilation system in this
vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs. These comfort
controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
Heater Only — Fleet Vehicles
Climate Control Location
Manual Heating Controls
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The mode control (at the right of the
control panel) can be set in any of the
following positions:
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
tified by the small dots.
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel.
Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level)
Select the recirculation modes when
the outside air contains smoke or
odors. This feature allows for recircu-
lation of interior air only. Air flows
through the panel outlets in this mode.
Air flows through the panel only or
through both the panel and floor vents
depending on the selected mode (panel vs bi-level).
Bi-Level
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and at the floor.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
4
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the
edge of each side of the instrument panel.
Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left of the
control panel is the blower control.
Turn the knob clockwise to one of the
four positions to obtain the blower
speed you desire. To turn the blower
off, turn the knob to the far left posi-
tion.
Temperature Control
The rotary knob at the center of the
control panel controls the temperature
of the interior air. You can choose your
degree of comfort by rotating the
knob. The coldest temperature setting
is to the extreme left (blue region) and
the warmest setting is to the extreme
right (red region) of the rotation.
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning and Heating — If Equipped
Air Conditioning Operation
To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan
control at any speed and press the snowflake
button located at the right of the control panel.
Conditioned air will be directed through the
outlets selected by the mode control. A light in the
snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is on.
Press the button a second time to turn the air condition-
ing off.
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed
when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and
off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy.
The mode control (at the right of the
control panel) can be set in any of the
following positions:
Air Conditioning And Heating
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
4
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
tified by the small dots.
Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level)
Select the recirculation modes when
the outside air contains smoke, odors,
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is
desired. This feature allows for recir-
culation of interior air only. Air flows
through the panel only or through
both the panel and floor vents depend-
ing on the selected mode (panel vs bi-level).
NOTE: Selecting a “Recirculation Mode” mode does not
necessarily consume more fuel than normal A/C mode.
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel.
Bi-Level
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and at the floor.
Floor
Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-
lets located under the instrument panel.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets, and the air conditioning
may be on.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the
edge of each side of the instrument panel, and the air
conditioning may be on.
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left of the
control panel is the blower control.
Turn the knob clockwise to one of the
four positions to obtain the blower
speed you desire. To turn the blower
off, turn the knob to the far left posi-
tion.
Temperature Control
The rotary knob at the center of the
control panel controls the temperature
of the interior air. You can choose your
degree of comfort by rotating the
knob. The coldest temperature setting
is to the extreme left (blue region) and
the warmest setting is to the extreme
right (red region) of the rotation.
Circulation
The cab is designed with features to promote outside air
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular
exchange of cab air.
Side window demisters direct air flow specifically to the
window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the
glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper
edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also pro-
vide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation
whenever the Floor, Mix or Defrost modes are in use. To
remove frost from the side windows, it is best to use the
full defrost mode.
NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a
hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of
time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air
conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of
a problem with the air conditioning system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
4
Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
Sideview Mirrors — If Equipped
The Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
side view mirrors are activated by pressing the
heated grid button, located on the Climate Control panel,
with the ignition On. Turning Off the ignition will
deactivate the Electric Rear Window Defroster and
Heated side view mirrors feature. These features also
turn off after activation, when 15 minutes have elapsed.
To reactivate, simply press the button again.
Air Conditioning with Dual Zone Temperature
Control — If Equipped
With the Dual Zone Temperature Control System, each
front seat occupant can independently control the tem-
perature of air coming from the outlets on their side of
the vehicle.
Dual Zone Control Head
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning and Heating Operation
To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan control at any
speed and press the snowflake button located on the
control panel. Conditioned air will be directed through
the outlets selected by the mode control. A light in the
snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is on.
Press the button a second time to turn the air condition-
ing off.
A/C Pushbutton
With the fan control in the ON posi-
tion, pushing the A/C button turns on
the air conditioning compressor. An
indicator light on the button shows
that the Air Conditioning compressor
is on. Conditioned air is now directed
through the mode outlets selected.
Pushing the button a second time turns the compressor
OFF.
Recirculation Pushbutton
Pushing the Recirculation button al-
lows interior air to recirculate continu-
ously in any position except defrost
and defrost/floor mode for rapid cool
down of the interior. See “Fast
Cooldown” later in this section.
Mode Control
The mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution.
NOTE:
To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between the
major modes. These intermediate positions are identified by
the small dots and give an even blend of both modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
4
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to
direct the airflow.
Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel and those located on the floor.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Heat
Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-
lets located under the instrument panel.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield and side window demist outlets.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if
the A/C button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies
the air to help dry the windshield.
Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left of the
control panel is the blower control.
Turn the knob clockwise to one of the
four positions to obtain the blower
speed you desire. To turn the blower
off, turn the knob to the far left posi-
tion.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Dual Zone Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. This is accomplished
by having separate temperature control slides for both
the driver and front passenger. The blue area of the scale
indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
Sideview Mirrors — If Equipped
The Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
side view mirrors are activated by pressing the
heated grid button, located on the Climate Control panel,
with the ignition On. Turning Off the ignition will
deactivate the Electric Rear Window Defroster and
Heated side view mirrors feature. These features also
turn off after activation, when 15 minutes have elapsed.
To reactivate, simply press the button again.
Dual Zone Temperature Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
4
Circulation
The cab is designed with features to promote outside air
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular
exchange of cab air.
Side window demisters direct air flow specifically to the
window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the
glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper
edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also pro-
vide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation
whenever the Floor, Mix or Defrost modes are in use.
NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a
hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of
time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air
conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of
a problem with the air conditioning system.
Rear Air Duct—Mega Cab Only
The rear seat will receive air flow in all modes except for
Defrost.
The rear air duct is designed to be pointed up when in
A/C mode, and pointed down in Heat mode.
Mega Cab Rear Air Duct
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips
Fast Cooldown
For a fast cooldown, turn the blower fan rotary knob to
the extreme right position, turn the mode control to the
panel fresh position, press the snowflake button to turn
on the air conditioning, and drive with the windows
open for the first few minutes. Once the hot air has been
expelled, close the windows and press the Recirculation
push-button. When a comfortable condition has been
reached, choose a mode position and adjust the tempera-
ture control slide and blower speed as necessary to
maintain comfort. For high humidity conditions it may
be necessary to remain in the Recirculation mode to
maintain comfort.
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases
turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the snowflake
button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control,
air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort.
As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode
position on the control. Adjust the temperature control
and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher blower
speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the
windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
defrost mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
4
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %
concentration is recommended. Refer to Recommended
Fluids and Genuine Parts for the proper coolant type.
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic
in hot weather especially when towing a trailer, addi-
tional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is
encountered, operate the transmission in a lower gear to
increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed. When
stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to shift into
NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightly for fast
idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed.
NOTE: On models equipped with Diesel engines, the
idle speed will automatically increase to 1000 rpm at
elevated coolant temperatures to improve engine cooling.
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstruc-
tions.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips Chart
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Ignition/Starter Switch ...................294
▫ Lock ..............................294
▫ Off ...............................294
▫ On................................294
▫ Start ..............................295
▫ ACC ..............................295
▫ Manual Transmission Key Release Button ....295
▫ Key Reminder .......................296
䡵 Starting Procedures .....................296
▫ Manual Transmission ..................296
▫ Automatic Transmission ................296
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................297
▫ Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ........297
▫ After Starting ........................298
䡵 Transmission Shifting ....................299
▫ Automatic Transmission With Overdrive .....299
▫ Manual Transmission ..................304
䡵 Four-Wheel- Drive Operation — If Equipped . . . 308
5
▫ Manually Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions ................308
▫ Shifting Procedure - Manually Shifted
Transfer Case ........................311
▫ Transfer Case Reminder Light ............312
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions (5 Position Switch)—
If Equipped .........................312
▫ Shifting Procedure - Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case ........................318
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions (4 Position Switch)—
If Equipped .........................320
▫ Shifting Procedure - Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case ........................325
䡵 Limited-Slip Differential — If Equipped .......327
䡵 Parking Brake .........................328
䡵 Brake System ..........................330
▫ 3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only ........330
▫ Brake Noise .........................330
▫ Rear Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System —
RWAL .............................331
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System —
If Equipped .........................331
䡵 Power Steering ........................333
䡵 Multi Displacement System (MDS) -
5.7L Engine Only .......................334
䡵 Tire Safety Information ...................335
▫ Tire Markings ........................335
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ..........338
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........339
䡵 Tires—General Information ................343
▫ Tire Pressure .........................343
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................344
▫ Radial-Ply Tires ......................346
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped .........347
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped .........348
▫ Tire Spinning ........................348
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................349
▫ Life Of Tire .........................350
▫ Replacement Tires .....................350
▫ Alignment And Balance .................351
䡵 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information –
If Equipped ...........................352
䡵 Tire Chains ...........................352
䡵 Snow Tires ...........................354
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations ............354
▫ Dual Rear Wheels .....................355
䡵 Fuel Requirements ......................356
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................357
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............358
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................358
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................359
▫ Fuel System Cautions ..................359
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ..............360
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
5
䡵 Adding Fuel ..........................360
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............361
䡵 Flexible Fuel— (Fleet Vehicles Only) .........363
▫ E-85 General Information ................363
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ....................363
▫ Fuel Requirements ....................363
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles .............364
▫ Starting ............................364
▫ Cruising Range .......................365
▫ Replacement Parts .....................365
▫ Maintenance .........................365
䡵 Catalytic Converter .....................365
䡵 Vehicle Loading ........................367
▫ Certification Label .....................367
䡵 Trailer Towing .........................370
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............370
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ...............372
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .........373
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............373
▫ Towing Requirements ..................375
▫ Towing Tips .........................379
▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped ......381
䡵 Snowplow ............................382
▫ Dodge Ram 1500 Models ................382
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Before Plowing .......................383
▫ Snowplow Model Prep Package Availability . . 384
▫ Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached ...........................385
▫ Methods For Removing Snow ............385
▫ Operating Tips .......................385
▫ General Maintenance ...................386
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 387
▫ Recreational Towing – 2 Wheel Drive
Models ............................387
▫ Recreational Towing – 4 Wheel Drive
Models ............................387
䡵 Driving Off-Road .......................394
䡵 Traction .............................395
䡵 Equipment Identification Plate .............395
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
5
IGNITION/STARTER SWITCH LOCK
Locks the automatic transmission shift control into the
PARK position. It also engages the steering wheel lock (if
equipped) when the steering wheel is turned.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
depressed to shift out of Park (P).
OFF
Unlocks the steering wheel (if equipped with locking
wheel) and the automatic transmission shift control with
engine off.
ON
This is the normal running position.
Ignition Switch Positions
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
START
Starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key.
The ignition key will return to the ON position for
normal driving.
ACC
Allows the electrical accessories to be used when the
engine is not running.
Manual Transmission Key Release Button
To remove the key on vehicles equipped with manual
transmissions, turn the key to the Lock position and press
the button to remove the ignition key.
Ignition Key Release Button
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
5
Key Reminder
An alarm will sound to remind you if the key is left in the
ignition and the driver’s door is opened.
STARTING PROCEDURES
The starter should not be operated for more than 15-
second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
Manual Transmission
Apply the parking brake, place the gearshift control lever
in NEUTRAL and depress the clutch pedal to the floor
before starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with
a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start
unless the clutch is fully depressed.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the selector lever in NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting of either a warm or cold engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key to the START position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
10 seconds, turn the key to the OFF position, wait 5
seconds, then repeat the starting procedure.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
depressed to shift out of Park (P).
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
normal starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the normal starting procedure should be
repeated.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
Engine Block Heater — If Equipped
The engine block heater warms the engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
5
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood to
the right side of the vehicle and held to the body with
removable clips.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de-
crease as the engine warms up.
CAUTION!
Long periods of engine idling, especially at high
engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust tempera-
tures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave
your vehicle unattended with the engine running.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRANSMISSION SHIFTING
Automatic Transmission with Overdrive
The gear shift selector display, located in the instrument
panel cluster, indicates the transmission gear range (the
selector is illuminated for night driving). The selector
lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column.
You must depress the brake pedal, to pull the selector
lever out of park (P) position (Brake Interlock System). To
drive, move the selector lever from Park or Neutral to the
desired drive position. Pull the selector lever toward you
when shifting into Reverse, Second, First or Park, or
when shifting out of Park.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or
Neutral position into another gear range.
“P” Park
This gear position supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in
this range. Never use Park while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range. Always apply parking brake first, then place the
selector in Park position. On 4-wheel-drive vehicles be
sure that the transfer case is in a drive position!
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmis-
sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
5
WARNING!
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to
move the gearshift lever back and forth without first
pulling it toward you after you have set it in P. Make
sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
“R” Reverse
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
“N” Neutral
Shift to Neutral when the vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with the engine running. The engine may
be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving, with
the transmission in neutral (N) position, can cause severe
damage to the transmission.
“D” Drive
This position provides all forward gears, including 3rd
gear direct and 4th and 5th (if equipped) gear overdrive
(see Overdrive Operation). Use this range for most city
and highway driving.
“2” Second
Use this position for driving slowly in heavy city traffic
or on mountain roads where more precise speed control
is desirable. Use it also when climbing long grades, and
for engine braking when descending moderately steep
grades.
NOTE: Do not exceed maximum engine speed.
“1” First
Use this position for driving up very steep hills and for
engine braking at low speeds (20 mph [32 km/h] or less)
when going downhill.
NOTE: Do not exceed maximum engine speed.
Overdrive Operation
The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec-
tronically controlled fourth and fifth (if equipped) speed
(Overdrive). The transmission will automatically shift
from Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are
present:
•
the transmission selector is in Drive;
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
5
•
the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-
perature;
•
vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48
km/h);
•
the “TOW HAUL O/D OFF” switch has not been
activated;
•
transmission has reached normal operating tempera-
ture.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem-
peratures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive
and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under
torque converter clutch, later in this section.
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP light
may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out
of Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After
cooldown, the transmission will resume normal opera-
tion.
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive
if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
When To Use “TOW HAUL” and “O/D OFF”
Modes
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the “TOW HAUL O/D OFF” button once to
select TOW HAUL. This will improve performance and
reduce the potential for transmission overheating or
failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in
“TOW HAUL” mode, 5th gear (if equipped) is disabled
and 2-3 and 3-4 shift patterns are modified. Shifts into
Overdrive (4th gear) are allowed during steady cruise
(for improved fuel economy) and automatic closed-
throttle downshifts to 3rd gear are performed (for im-
proved braking) when driving conditions warrant. Press-
ing the “TOW HAUL O/D OFF” button a second time to
select O/D OFF will disable 4th and 5th gear completely,
which should eliminate any excessive transmission shift-
ing.
The “TOW HAUL” or “O/D OFF” light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has
been activated. Pressing the switch a third time restores
normal operation. If the “TOW HAUL” or “O/D OFF”
modes are desired, the button must be pressed each time
the engine is started.
Tow Haul O/D Off Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
5
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature, designed to improve fuel economy, has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
acceleration when the transmission downshifts to second
gear, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1-3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Pressing the “TOW HAUL O/D OFF” button, when the
transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that
the transmission is able to shift into and out of overdrive.
NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several
days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the
transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to
the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into
any other gear position.
Manual Transmission
NOTE: The parking brake should be engaged before
leaving the vehicle, especially on an incline.
Truck models with manual transmission are equipped
with a clutch interlocking ignition system. The clutch
pedal must be fully depressed to start the vehicle.
Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelera-
tor pedal.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
To shift into Reverse, come to a complete stop. Depress
the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to
stop. Move the shift lever from the Neutral position
straight across and back into Reverse.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on
the clutch.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both
fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. Earlier upshifts
during cruise conditions (steady speeds) will result in
increased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated.
Manual Transmission — 6 Speed (G56)
2500 and 3500 models are equipped with the G56 manual
transmission. This transmission has a “creeper” 1st gear
which should be used to start from a standing position
when carrying a payload or towing a trailer. Damage to
the clutch can result from starting in 2nd or 3rd gear with
a loaded vehicle. An unloaded vehicle may be launched
in 2nd gear. Use each gear in numerical order – do not
skip a gear.
For most city driving you may find it easier to use only
1st through 5th gear ranges. For steady highway driving
with light accelerations, 6th gear is recommended. To
shift into 5th gear, move the shift lever to the right
beyond the spring pressure point and push it forward.
When shifting from 5th to 4th gear, pull the lever down
toward you in one motion. Do not pull the lever sharply
left as you may shift accidentally into 2nd gear and
damage the transmission.
To shift into Reverse, come to a complete stop. Depress
the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to
stop. Reverse has a “crash-through” lockout feature.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
5
Move the shift lever from the Neutral position straight
across, in one swift motion, and down into Reverse.
6 Speed Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in mph
(km//h)
Engine Model Axle Mode
1to
2
2to
3
3to
4
4to
5
5to
6
5.7L
2500/
3500
ALL
Accel
&
Cruise
15
(24)
25
(40)
40
(65)
45
(72)
50
(81)
Manual Transmission — 6-Speed (G238)
NOTE: The parking brake should be engaged before
leaving the vehicle, especially on an incline.
1500 models are equipped with a G238 manual transmis-
sion. This transmission has a clutch interlocking ignition
system. The clutch pedal must be fully depressed to start
the vehicle.
Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelera-
tor pedal. When launching a stationary vehicle, keep the
engine speed low until the clutch is fully engaged.
For improved clutch life, all six forward gears should be
used. For steady highway driving with light acceleration,
6th gear is recommended. When shifting from 5th to 6th
gear, do not apply excessive knob load toward the
Reverse gear gate, as you may overpower the Reverse
“crash-through” load and unintentionally clash into Re-
verse gear. Also, when shifting from 6th to 5th gear,
excessive knob load toward the Reverse gear gate will
result in blocking of the shift.
You should use first gear when starting from a standing
position. Damage to the clutch can result from starting in
2nd or 3rd gear. Use each gear in numerical order – do
not skip a gear.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
To shift into Reverse, come to a complete stop. Depress
the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to
stop. Reverse has a “crash-through” lockout feature.
Move the shift lever from the Neutral position straight
across, in one swift motion, and down into Reverse.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for fuel economy it
should be upshifted as listed below. Shift at the vehicle
speeds listed for acceleration. Earlier upshifts during
cruise conditions (relatively steady speeds) will result in
increased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
6 Speed Manual Transmission Shift Speed in mph
(km/h)
Engine Model Axle
Accel-
eration
Rate
1
to
2
2
to
3
3
to
4
4
to
5
5
to
6
3.7L 1500 ALL
ACCEL
&
CRUISE
15
(24)
10
(16)
24
(39)
19
(31)
34
(55)
27
(44)
47
(76)
37
(60)
56
(90)
41
(66)
4.7L 1500 ALL
ACCEL
&
CRUISE
15
(24)
25
(40)
40
(65)
45
(72)
50
(81)
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. For acceleration at speeds less than 20 mph (30
km/h), 2nd gear is recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
5
CAUTION!
When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the
engine which can cause valve damage.
FOUR-WHEEL- DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
Four-Wheel-Drive Dodge Ram Trucks are equipped with
either a Manually Shifted transfer case or an Electroni-
cally Shifted transfer case. See the operating instructions
for your transfer case, located within this section.
Manually Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions
The transfer case provides 4 mode positions-2(rear)-
wheel-drive high range, 4-wheel-drive high range, neu-
tral, and 4-wheel-drive low range.
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2-wheel-
drive position (2H) for normal street and highway con-
ditions such as dry hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required the transfer case 4H
and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear
driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
simply moving the shift lever to the desired positions.
The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on
dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear
and damage to the driveline components.
The 4-wheel-drive light (4WD), located in the instrument
cluster, alerts the driver that the vehicle is in 4-wheel
drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are locked
together. This light illuminates when the transfer case is
shifted to either the 4H or 4L positions. There is no light
for the 2H or N (Neutral) positions.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions
at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of 4-wheel-drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can
cause damage to the transfer case.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and
rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are
spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
Because 4-wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold tempera-
tures.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
5
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position see the information below:
2H
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.
4H
4-Wheel-Drive High Range - Locks the front and rear
driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
N
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more infor-
mation.
4L
4-Wheel-Drive Low Range - Low speed 4-wheel-drive.
Locks the front and rear driveshafts together. Forces the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Procedure - Manually Shifted Transfer
Case
2H ⇔ 4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion,
shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage / disen-
gage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator
pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant force
when shifting the transfer case lever.
2H or 4H ⇔ 4L
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
an automatic transmission to N (Neutral) or depress the
clutch on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in
transfer case N (Neutral).
NOTE: Pausing in transfer case N (Neutral) in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission may require
shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while
completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift automatic
transmission to N (Neutral), hold foot on brake, and turn
engine OFF. Make shift to the desired mode.
Manual Transfer Case Shifter
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
5
NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped, however difficulty may oc-
cur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly
aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch
teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The pre-
ferred method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5
km/h).
NOTE: Do not attempt to shift to or from 4L while the
transmission is in gear or clutch is engaged.
Transfer Case Reminder Light
The four-wheel-drive operating light (4WD), located in
the instrument cluster, is used to alert the driver that the
front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are
driving.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions (5 Position Switch)—If
Equipped
This is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
5 Position Switch
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
This Electronically Shifted transfer case provides 5 mode
positions: 2 wheel drive (2WD), 4WD AUTO, 4WD HI,
Neutral and 4WD Lo.
The Electronically Shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the 2 wheel drive position (2WD) or 4 wheel
drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and high-
way conditions (dry hard surfaced roads). Driving the
vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits,
as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
For variable driving conditions the 4WD AUTO mode
can be used. In this mode the front axle is engaged, but
the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four wheel
drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction. Because the front axle is en-
gaged, this mode will result in lower fuel economy than
the 2WD mode.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD HI and 4WD LO positions can be used to lock the
front and rear driveshafts together and force the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the
desired position - see Shifting Procedure section for
specific shifting instructions. The 4WD HI and 4WD LO
positions are designed for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Driving in the 4WD HI and 4WD LO positions on
dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear
and damage to the driveline components.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
5
NOTE: The transfer case Neutral (N) position is selected
by depressing the recessed button located on the lower
left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer
case Neutral (N) position is to be used for recreational
towing only. See the Recreational Towing section for
specific procedures on shifting into and out of Neutral
(N).
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights —
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Only
Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the
instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired
transfer case selection. When you select a different trans-
fer case position, the indicator lights will do the follow-
ing:
If All Shift Conditions are Met
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
Neutral Button
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
If One or More Shift Conditions are not Met
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-
tinue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five (5)
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
The “SERVICE 4WD” warning light monitors the electric
shift 4WD system. If this light remains on after engine
start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the
4WD system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the ⴖService 4WDⴖ light is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LO, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
5
AUTO or 4WD HI positions at a given road speed. Take
care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25
mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because 4 wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position see the information below:
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.
4WD AUTO
Automatic 4–wheel drive sends power to the rear wheels.
4–wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the
vehicle senses a loss of traction. Additional traction for
varying road conditions.
4WD HI
4 Wheel Drive High Range - Locks the front and rear
driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LO
4 Wheel Drive Low Range - Low speed 4 wheel drive.
Locks the front and rear driveshafts together. Forces the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
N
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more infor-
mation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
5
Shifting Procedure - Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift. The indicator light for the previous position
will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the requirements for
the selected position have been met. To retry a shift:
return the control knob back to the original position,
make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait
five (5) seconds and try the shift again.
NOTE: If all the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have been met, the current position indica-
tor light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator
light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
2WD ⇔ 4 AUTO or 4 HI
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD HI can be
done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage / disen-
gage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator
pedal after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is
5 Position Switch
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
stopped, the ignition key must be in the ON position with
the engine either RUNNING or OFF. This shift cannot be
completed if the key is in the accessory position.
2WD or 4 AUTO or 4 HI ⇔ 4LO
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LO some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3
mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER
OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
Preferred Procedure
1. With engine RUNNING, slow vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3
to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (depress clutch
on manual transmissions).
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
on manual transmissions).
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
RUNNING, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (de-
press clutch on manual transmissions).
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
on manual transmissions).
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
5
NOTE: If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or
if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is
in process then the desired position indicator light will
flash continuously while the original position indicator
light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NOTE: If your are leaving your vehicle stored for longer
than 21 days, refer to the section on “Vehicle Storage.”
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions (4 Position Switch)—If
Equipped
This is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
Transfer Case Switch
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
This Electronically Shifted transfer case provides 4 mode
positions: 2 (rear) wheel drive high range, 4 wheel drive
high range, 4 wheel drive low range, and neutral.
The Electronically Shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the 2 wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions (dry hard surfaced roads).
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4HI and 4LO positions can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired
position - see Shifting Procedure section for specific
shifting instructions. The 4HI and 4LO positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving
in the 4HI and 4LO positions on dry hard surfaced roads
may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driv-
eline components.
NOTE: The transfer case Neutral (N) position is selected
by depressing the recessed button located on the lower
left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer
case Neutral (N) position is to be used for recreational
towing only. See the Recreational Towing section for
specific procedures on shifting into and out of Neutral
(N).
Neutral Button
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
5
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights —
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Only
Transfer case position indicator lights are located in the
instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired
transfer case selection. When you select a different trans-
fer case position, the indicator lights will do the follow-
ing:
If All Shift Conditions are Met
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One or More Shift Conditions are not Met
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-
tinue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five (5)
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
The “SERVICE 4WD” warning light monitors the electric
shift 4WD system. If this light remains on after engine
start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the
4WD system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the ⴖService 4WDⴖ light is illumi-
nated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow the
vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4LO, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4HI
positions at a given road speed. Take care not to over-
speed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because 4 wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
5
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position see the information below:
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.
4HI
4 Wheel Drive High Range - Locks the front and rear
driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
4LO
4 Wheel Drive Low Range - Low speed 4 wheel drive.
Locks the front and rear driveshafts together. Forces the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
N
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more infor-
mation.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Procedure - Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift.The indicator light for the previous position
will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the requirements for
the selected position have been met. To retry a shift:
return the control knob back to the original position,
make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait
five (5) seconds and try the shift again.
NOTE: If all the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have been met, the current position indica-
tor light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator
light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
2WD⇔ 4HI
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4HI can be done with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion,
the transfer case will engage / disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning
the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition
Transfer Case Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
5
key must be in the ON position with the engine either
RUNNING or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if the
key is in the accessory position.
NOTE: The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between
2WD/4HI if the front and/or rear wheels are spinning
(no traction). In this situation the selected position indi-
cator light will flash and the original position indicator
light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop
spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
2WD or 4HI ⇔ 4LO
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4LO some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3
mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER
OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
Preferred Procedure
1. With engine RUNNING, slow vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3
to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (depress clutch
on manual transmissions).
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
on manual transmissions).
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
RUNNING, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (de-
press clutch on manual transmissions).
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
on manual transmissions).
NOTE: If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
then the desired position indicator light will flash con-
tinuously while the original position indicator light is
ON, until all requirements have been met.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NOTE: If your are leaving your vehicle stored for longer
than 21 days, refer to the section on “Vehicle Storage.”
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL — IF EQUIPPED
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when
there is a difference between the traction characteristics
of the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit per-
forms similarly to a conventional differential. On slip-
pery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of
the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better
traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator
will supply maximum traction. When starting with only
one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight
momentary application of the parking brake may be
necessary to gain maximum traction.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
5
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differen-
tial, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground, since the vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose
control of the vehicle.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a
turn.
PARKING BRAKE
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
NOTE: The instrument cluster red brake warning light
will come on and flash to indicate that the parking brake
is applied. You must be sure that the parking brake is
fully applied before leaving the vehicle.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and
the gear shift lever is in the PARK position. When
parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake
before placing the gear shift lever in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the selector out of PARK.
WARNING!
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in Park, a manual transmission in
Reverse or first gear. Failure to do so may allow
the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
•
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan-
gerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake or the gear selector
lever. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving, failure to do so can lead to brake problems
due to excessive heating of the rear brakes.
Parking Brake Release
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
5
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the
brakes will still function. However, you will experience a
substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application,
greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activa-
tion of the BRAKE warning lamp and the ABS lamp (if
equipped) during brake use.
3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only
The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro-
boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering
system. You may experience some clicking or hissing
noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking
conditions.
NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be
higher than normal until the power steering oil reaches
operating temperature.
Brake Noise
During normal operation of the brake system certain
noises may be present from time to time. Occasional
⬙groan⬙ or ⬙squeal⬙ noises may occur during normal
operation of the brake system which may not be indica-
tive of a problem. These noises may be heard at any time
the brakes are applied but may be more noticeable during
the first few brake applications in the morning. Moisture,
hot or cold temperature, dust, and or other debris may
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
also contribute to the noise condition. Repeated or con-
tinuous noises during braking may be an indication that
the brake linings are worn and in need of replacement.
Rear Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System — RWAL
The Anti-lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically controls the opera-
tion of the rear brakes to prevent rear wheel lockup.
The system remains operational in the four-wheel drive
mode. The level of performance is reduced when the
front brakes are locked up. This may cause the rear
brakes to lockup through the drivetrain, which may
reduce the effectiveness of the Anti-lock Brake System.
During severe braking conditions, particularly with
changing road surfaces, such as ice to concrete, a slight
drop or minor pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Both Anti-Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated
electronic equipment. It may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or high out-
put radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capabil-
ity. Installation of such equipment should be per-
formed by qualified professionals.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System — If
Equipped
This Anti-lock Brake System is designed to aid the driver
in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking
conditions. The system operates with a separate com-
puter to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel
lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
5
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation. This is
normal.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving
use of the Anti-lock Brake System, you will experience
some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake
system and is normal.
Engagement of the Anti-lock Brake System may be
accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a
clicking noise. These occurrences are normal, and indi-
cate that the system is functioning.
ABS Warning Light
The Anti-lock Brake System includes an amber warning
light. When the light is illuminated, the Anti-lock Brake
System is not functioning. The system reverts to standard
non-anti-lock brakes.
WARNING!
Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natu-
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason, the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short period of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and does not in any
way damage the steering system.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
5
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolong operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) - 5.7L
Engine Only
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
•
LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
5
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
5
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
5
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sec-
tion of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
Kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
5
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result
in tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
5
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either
the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side “B” pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
Tire Placard Location
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire side wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
5
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
5
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section
6 of this manual.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
5
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident result-
ing in serious injury or death.
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, han-
dling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi-
cations or capability.
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-
tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance charac-
teristics, resulting in changes to steering, han-
dling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control
and have an accident resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
•
Fast tire wear.
•
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
•
Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
5
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION
– IF EQUIPPED
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen-
gers {150 lbs (68 kg) each} plus 200 lbs (91kg) of cargo.
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle
will be found on the face of the driver’s door.
TIRE CHAINS
Use “Class S” chains on 1500 Ram Trucks, or other
traction aids that meet SAE Type “S” specifications.
Use “Class U” chains on 2500/3500 Ram Trucks, or other
traction aids that meet SAE Type “U” specifications.
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle,
as recommended by the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other
suspension components, it is important that only chains in
good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious
vehicle damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could suggest chain breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the chain before further use.
• Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten
after driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps,
especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2 vehicles.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on
method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for
usage. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of
the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-
ing link and cable (radial) chains.
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of Ram
4X2 trucks.
NOTE: The use of class “S” chains is permitted on 1500
Ram Trucks with P245/70R17 tires only.
NOTE: The use of class “U” chains is permitted on the
front and rear of 4X4, 2500 Ram Trucks with LT245/
70R17E tires.
NOTE: The use of class “U” chains is permitted on the
front and rear of 4X4, 3500 Ram Trucks with Dual Rear
Wheels and LT235/80R17E tires.
NOTE: On 4X2 2500/3500 Ram Trucks, class “U” snow
chains are permitted on the rear wheels only of vehicles
equipped with LT245/70R17, LT265/70R17, and LT235/
80R17 size tires.
NOTE: On 4x4 2500/3500 SRW (Single Rear Wheel)
Ram Trucks, class “U” snow chains are permitted on the
rear wheels only of vehicles equipped with LT265/
70R17E.
CAUTION!
Do not use tire chains on 4x4 Ram trucks equipped
with P265/70R17, LT275/70R17, P275/60R20, tires.
There may not be adequate clearance for the chains
and you are risking structural or body damage to
your vehicle. Do not use tire chains on the 4X2 front
wheels of 2500/3500 SRW (Single Rear Wheels)
equipped with LT245/70R17, LT265/70R17 LT235/
80R17 tires or 4X4 front wheels of Ram Trucks
equipped with LT265/70R17E. There may not be
adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking
structural or body damage to your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
5
SNOW TIRES
Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc-
tion as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the
snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed
requirement associated with the tire. These tires should
always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity
inflation pressures under any load condition.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: On Canadian vehicles only, if your Ram truck is
equipped with All-Season type tires on the front and
ON/OFF Road type tires mounted on the rear, do not use
a front to back rotation pattern. Instead, rotate your tires
side to side at the recommended intervals.
Dual Rear Wheels
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set.
To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all
four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
5
CAUTION!
3500 Dual Rear Tires have only one approved direc-
tion of rotation. This is to accommodate the asym-
metrical design (tread pattern) of the ON/OFF road
tire and the use of Outline White Letter (OWL) tires.
•
When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to
be remounted on the rim or installed at a different
location to maintain the correct placement of the
tire on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel posi-
tion on the truck. For example, if the spare is used
to replace an outer rear tire it will have to be
remounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished
inward. That way the tread design of asymmetri-
cal tires and the white writing of the OWL tires
will maintain proper position.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
All engines (except 5.7L engines) are de-
signed to meet all emissions regulations
and provide excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high quality un-
leaded “regular” gasoline having an oc-
tane rating of 87. The routine use of pre-
mium gasoline is not recommended.
Under normal conditions the use of premium fuel will
not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines
and in some circumstances may result in poorer perfor-
mance.
The 5.7L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded gasoline hav-
ing an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu-
facturer recommends the use of 89 octane
for optimum performance.The routine use
3.7L/4.7L
Engines
5.7L Engines
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
of premium gasoline is not recommended. The use of
premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high
quality regular and mid-grade gasolines, and in some
circumstances may result in poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline be-
fore considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers world-wide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance
and durability for your vehicle. We recommend the use
of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they
are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines.
Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide
excellent performance and durability for the engine and
fuel system components.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
5
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing METHANOL.
Gasoline containing methanol may damage critical
fuel system components.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasolines
blended with MMT provide no performance advantage
beyond gasolines of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT reduce spark plug
life and reduce emission system performance. We recom-
mend that gasolines free of MMT be used in your vehicle.
The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gaso-
line retailer whether or not his/her gasoline contains
MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels
higher than allowed in the United States. MMT is pro-
hibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasolines sold in the United States are required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. There-
fore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
•
When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded
vehicle when the humidity is low and the temperature
is high, use a premium unleaded fuel to help prevent
spark knock. If spark knock persists, lighten the load,
or engine piston damage may result.
•
The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Many of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
5
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
•
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door about 2
inches (50 mm) inside the opening. If using a portable
fuel container, it should have a flexible nozzle long
enough to force open the restricting door.
NOTE: If fuel is poured from a portable container, the
container should have a flexible nozzle long enough to
extend into the fuel filler tube.
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each
time the vehicle is refueled.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door. If the gas cap is
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use
with this vehicle.
NOTE: After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic sys-
tem can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improp-
erly installed, or damaged. A GASCAP message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap
until a “clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication
that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer
reset button to turn the message off. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL light off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
5
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
•
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
FLEXIBLE FUEL— (Fleet Vehicles Only)
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by the unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
5
For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates be-
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided.
When you do switch fuels, it is recommended that
•
you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
than 1/4 full
•
you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling
•
you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in drivability
during warm up.
NOTE: When the ambient temperature is above 90°F,
you may experience hard starting and rough idle follow-
ing start up even if the above recommendations are
followed.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) and Gasoline Vehicles
Whether operating the vehicle on an E-85 ethanol fuel or
unleaded gasoline the engine oil requirements are the
same. Refer to the “Maintenance Procedures” section of
this manual for the proper quality and viscosity engine
oil. (See page 433 for more information.)
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F. In the range
of 0°F to 32°F, you may experience an increase in the time
it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration in
drivability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is
fully warmed up.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than
gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel con-
sumption. You can expect your MPG and your driving
range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline
operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
If you operate the vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow Sched-
ule B in the maintenance schedule section of this manual.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device. Under normal
operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not
require maintenance. However, you must keep the en-
gine maintained to assure proper operation and prevent
possible damage.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
5
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
As with any vehicle, do not park or operate this vehicle in
areas where combustible materials such as grass or leaves
can come in contact with a hot exhaust system.
A scorching odor may be detected if you continue to run
a malfunctioning engine. The odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Service, including a tune-up to
manufacturer’s specifications should be obtained imme-
diately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
5
Tire Size
The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front
or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Also overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
An EXAMPLE of a loaded vehicle is shown in the
following chart. Note that neither GVWR nor GAWR
capabilities are exceeded. Overloading can cause poten-
tial safety hazards and shorten service life.
NOTE: The weights shown in this chart are not
necessarily the weights for your vehicle. Also, the
amount of load added to both the front and rear axles
can be computed after the vehicle has been weighed
both in its ⴖcurb weightⴖ condition, and in its ⴖloaded
and ready for operationⴖ condition.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 6500 LBS.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
5
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The recom-
mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings in-
clude a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a
driver).
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
5
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch includes a receiver attached
to the tow vehicle, plus a removable hitch head and
spring bar assembly that fits into the receiver opening
and hook up brackets that connect the spring bars to the
trailer frame.
Fifth-Wheel Hitch
A special high platform with a coupling that mounts over
the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed. Connects
a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin.
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm
which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup
truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted
over the rear axle in the truck bed.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2,000
lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to
the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory
equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000
lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package.
See your dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” for the website address that contains
the necessary information for your specific drivetrain.
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Fifth Wheel/
Gooseneck
Greater than 10,000 lbs (4540
kg)
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
•
http:// www.dodge.com/towing.
•
http:// www.dodge.ca (Canada).
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
5
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual.
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
etrain components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
5
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P for Park. With a manual transmission, shift the
transmission into reverse. And with four-wheel-drive
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in neutral.
Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements — Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
−
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
−
When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Infor-
mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
5
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may includea4and7pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
4 - Pin Connector
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “TOW
HAUL” or “OD/OFF” range should be selected.
NOTE: Using the “TOW HAUL” or “OD/OFF” range
while operating the vehicle under heavy operating con-
ditions will improve performance and extend transmis-
sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
This action will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule “B” in
section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change
intervals.
7- Pin Connector
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
5
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Towing Tips — Tow/Haul (If Equipped)
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ing, turn the “TOW HAUL OD/OFF” feature ON when
driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive
position 2 on more severe grades.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
−
Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in neutral and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
−
refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more informa-
tion.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
head to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or out-
board, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped Out or
In). A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main
mirror surface.
NOTE: Fold the7x10inch trailer towing mirrors
rearward prior to entering an automated car wash.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to fold the7x10inch trailer towing
mirrors forward. The7x10inch trailer towing
mirrors are not designed to be folded forward and
doing so will damage the mirrors and/or vehicle.
Blindspot Mirror
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
5
SNOWPLOW
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory
installed option. These packages include components
necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.
Dodge Ram 1500 Models
NOTE: Do not use Dodge Ram 1500 Models for snow-
plow applications.
WARNING!
On 1500 Models, snowplows, winches, and other
aftermarket equipment should not be added to the
front end of your vehicle. The airbag crash sensors
may be affected by the change in the front end
structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or
could fail to deploy during a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Trailer Towing Position
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Using 1500 Model vehicles for snowplow applica-
tions can cause damage to the vehicle.
NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly
recommended that the owner / installer obtain and
follow the recommendations contained within the cur-
rent Dodge BODY BUILDER’S GUIDE. See your dealer,
installer or snowplow manufacture for this information.
There are unique electrical systems that must be con-
nected to properly assure operator safety and prevent
overloading vehicle systems.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could ad-
versely affect performance of the airbag system in an
accident. Do not expect that the airbag will perform
as described earlier in this manual
CAUTION!
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exte-
rior lamps are not properly installed.
Before plowing
•
Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid
level.
•
Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tight-
ness.
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
5
•
Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear.
The cutting edge should be 1/4 to 1/2 inch (6.4 mm
to13 mm) above ground in snow plowing position.
•
Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func-
tioning properly.
Snowplow Model Prep Package Availability
For Detailed Information Visit www.dodge.com or refer
to the Current Dodge Truck Body Builders Guide.
1. The 1500 models are NOT available for snowplow
applications.
2. The maximum number of occupants in the truck
should not exceed two.
3. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear
GAWR should never be exceeded.
4. The snowplow prep packages are not available with
the Sport Package.
5. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of
options or passengers, etc.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow
system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers,
options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR)
ratings. These weights are specified on the Safety Com-
pliance Certification Label on the driver’s side door
opening.
NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting
passengers.
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifica-
tions at the factory without consideration for the weight
of the plow. Front end tow-in should be checked and
reset if necessary at the beginning and end of the
snowplow season. This will help prevent uneven tire
wear.
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is
parked.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip-
ment following the recommendations provided by the
specific snowplow manufacturer.
Over the Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the
engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures.
Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade
completely and position it as low as road or surface
conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The
operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance
and allow adequate passing clearance.
Methods For Removing Snow
Operating Tips
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h)
should be maximum operating speed. The operator
should be familiar with the area and surface to be
cleaned. Reduce speed and use extreme caution when
plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
5
NOTE: During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped
with an overhead console module, the outside tempera-
ture display will show higher temperatures than the
outside ambient temperature. The higher displayed tem-
perature is due to blocked or reduced airflow to the
underhood ambient temperature sensor by the snow-
plow. This is common and outside temperature display
operation will return to normal when the snowplow is
removed.
General Maintenance
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the
plow manufacturer’s instructions. Whenever the plow is
disconnected from the vehicle, coat the exposed angling
cylinder rods with chassis lubricant. The lift cylinder
should be extended upward and chassis lubricant ap-
plied to the lift rod. The hydraulic hoses interconnect to
keep the couplers clean.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery
terminals clean and free of corrosion.
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and driv-
etrain damage, the following precautions should be ob-
served.
•
Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small
or congested areas where speeds are not likely to
exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in
4H.
•
Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has
returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a
practice of stepping on the brake pedal before shifting
the transmission between forward and reverse.
NOTE: Change the automatic transmission fluid and
filter(s) according to Maintenance Schedule ⬙B.⬙
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational Towing – 2 Wheel Drive Models
Recreational towing 2 Wheel Drive is not allowed.
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground can result in
severe transmission damage.
Recreational Towing – 4 Wheel Drive Models
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these requirements can cause se-
vere damage to the transmission and/or transfer case.
CAUTION!
Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a
front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
NOTE: Both the Manual Shift and Electronic Shift
transfer cases must be shifted into Neutral (N) for
recreational towing. Automatic transmissions must be
placed in P (Park) position for recreational towing.
Manual transmissions must be left in gear (not in neutral)
for recreational towing. Refer below for the proper trans-
fer case Neutral shifting procedure for your vehicle.
Recreational Towing Procedure — Manual Shift
Transfer Case — If Equipped
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
5
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in N (NEUTRAL) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut OFF the engine.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Shift automatic transmission to N (NEUTRAL), or
depress the clutch on manual transmissions.
5. Shift transfer case lever into N (NEUTRAL).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R).
8. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with the transmission in Drive
(D).
10. Shut OFF the engine and place the ignition key to the
unlocked OFF position.
11. Shift automatic transmission into P (PARK).
12. Apply the parking brake.
13. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the automatic transmission may occur if
the transmission is shifted into P (PARK) with the
transfer case in N (NEUTRAL) and the engine RUN-
NING. With the transfer case in N (NEUTRAL)
ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the
transmission into P (PARK)
Returning to Normal Operation — Manual Shift
Transfer Case
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Shut OFF the engine.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Shift automatic transmission to N (NEUTRAL), or
depress the clutch on manual transmissions.
6. Shift transfer case lever to desired position.
7. Shift automatic transmission into P (Park).
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(NEUTRAL) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case N (NEUTRAL)
position disengages both the front and rear drive-
shafts from the powertrain and will allow the ve-
hicle to move regardless of the transmission posi-
tion. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
5
CAUTION!
•
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
•
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage
the internal parts.
Recreational Towing Procedure — Electronic Shift
Transfer Case — If Equipped
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in Neutral (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut OFF the engine.
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, but do not
start the engine.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress
clutch on manual transmission.
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for
4 seconds.
7. After shift is completed and the Neutral (N) light
comes on release Neutral (N) button.
8. Start engine.
9. Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R).
10. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in Drive
(D).
12. Shut engine OFF and place ignition key to the
unlocked OFF position.
13. Shift automatic transmission into Park (P).
14. Apply parking brake.
15. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
16. Release parking brake.
NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button,
and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elapses
and the shift has been completed. If any of these require-
ments (with the exception of 3 - Key ON) are not met
prior to depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no
longer met during the 4 second timer, then the Neutral
(N) indicator light will flash continuously until all re-
quirements are met or until the Neutral (N) button is
released.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key in not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
5
NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into Park (P) with the transfer case
in Neutral (N) and the engine RUNNING. With the
transfer case in Neutral (N) ensure that the engine is
OFF prior to shifting the transmission into Park (P).
Returning to Normal Operation — Electronic Shift
Transfer Case
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut OFF the engine.
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, but do not
start the engine.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress
clutch on manual transmission.
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for
1 second.
7. After the Neutral (N) indicator light turns off release
the Neutral (N) button.
8. After the Neutral (N) button has been released the
transfer case will shift to the position identified by the
selector switch.
9. Shift automatic transmission into P (Park).
NOTE: The transfer case can not be shifted into Neutral
(N) from the 4Auto (if equipped) position.
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button,
and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses and
the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements
(with the exception of 3 - key ON) are not met prior to
depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no longer met
during the 1 second time, then all of the mode position
indicator lights will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the Neutral (N) button is released.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
despite the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
5
CAUTION!
•
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
•
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and fluid
loss will damage internal parts.
DRIVING OFF-ROAD
Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep
hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural
obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill,
choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible.
Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down using
REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL, or
diagonally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain,
shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator
slowly to avoid spinning the wheels.
DO NOT REDUCE the tire pressures for this type of
driving.
NOTE: After off-road usage, particularly in sand or
mud, inspect the underside of the vehicle for accumu-
lated dirt at the propeller shaft, axles, U-joints, brake
rotors and calipers.
Use a hose to clean off any accumulation of dirt or mud.
Check the exhaust system and all exposed components
for any sign of damage.
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud,
slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for im-
pacted material. Impacted foreign material can cause a
wheel imbalance. Removing the foreign material from
the wheels will correct the situation.
TRACTION
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE
The equipment Identification Plate is located on the hood
inner surface.
The following information about your vehicle is dis-
played on this plate: Model, Wheelbase, Vehicle Identifi-
cation Number, Truck Order Number, and code numbers
with descriptions of all production and special equip-
ment on the truck as shipped from the factory.
NOTE: Always refer to the Equipment Identification
Plate When Ordering Parts.
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Lights ..................398
䡵 Jack Location ..........................399
▫ Removal (2500/3500/Mega Cab) ..........399
▫ Removal
(1500 Standard Cab/Quad Cab Vehicles) .....400
▫ Reinstalling The Scissors-Type Jack And Tools
(1500 Models) ........................401
䡵 Changing A Flat Tire ....................403
▫ Removing The Spare Tire ................404
▫ Tire Changing Procedure ................405
䡵 Hoisting .............................416
䡵 Jump-Starting .........................416
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..................419
䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ........420
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle ................420
▫ 4-Wheel- Drive Vehicles .................421
▫ 2–Wheel- Drive Vehicles ................421
6
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS
The Hazard Warning switch is mounted on the top of the
steering column as shown in the illustration.
To engage the Hazard Warning lights, depress the button
on the top of the steering column. When the Hazard
Warning switch is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash off and on to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning lights will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning lights
may discharge your battery.
Hazard Light Warning Switch
398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACK LOCATION
Removal (2500/3500/Mega Cab)
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front
passenger seat. Lift the flap on the side of the seat for
access.
Remove the jack and tools by removing the wing bolt and
sliding the assembly from under the seat.
Jack Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399
6
WARNING!
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes, unless suitable sup-
ports are placed under the vehicle as a safety mea-
sure. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them
in the original carrier and location. While driving
you may experience, abrupt stopping, rapid accelera-
tion, or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or
other objects in the vehicle may move around with
force, resulting in serious injury.
Removal (1500 Standard Cab/Quad Cab Vehicles)
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front
passenger seat. Lift the tab and slide the plactic cover
forward for access.
Jack Cover
400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Fold the flap and roll the jack tool kit into a cylindrical
package (in direction of arrows), and tie to the jack using
the tie straps.
Folding Flap and Rolling Bag
Tying Bag to Jack with Straps
402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding
the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools
under seat so that the bottom slot engages into the
fastener on the floor and then secure to the floor pan
using the wing bolt. Reinstall the plastic cover.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
Jack and Tools Tied Jack Wing Bolt
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403
6
Removing The Spare Tire
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck.
Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube. Insert
the tube through the access hole between the lower
tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube. Rotate the wheel wrench handle coun-
terclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with
enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under
the vehicle. When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the
end of the cable and pull it through the center of the
wheel.
It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to
avoid tangling the loose cable.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Changing Procedure
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The jack is
designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle only.
It is not recommended that the jack be used for service
purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time.
Preparations
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas. Set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE
(manual transmission). On four-wheel drive vehicles,
shift the transfer case to the “4L” position.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405
6
•
Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the jacking position. For
example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block
the left rear wheel.
•
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.
• Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Placement of the Jack:
•
For 1500 series trucks, when changing a front wheel,
place the scissors jack under the rear portion of the
lower control arm as shown below.
1500 4X2 Jacking Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407
6
•
For 2500/3500 4x2 series trucks, when changing a
front wheel, place the bottle jack under the frame
rail behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far forward
as possible on the straight part of the frame.
•
Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the
wheel wrench. The tube extension, may be used, but
is not required.
•
For 2500/3500 4x4 series trucks, when changing the
front wheel, assemble the jack drive tube to the jack
and connect the drive tube to the extension tube.
1500 4X4 Jacking Location 2500/3500 4X2 Jacking
408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as
possible with the drive tubes extending to the front.
Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
•
For all trucks, when changing a rear wheel, as-
semble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect
the drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack
under the axle between the spring and the shock
absorber with the drive tubes extending to the rear.
•
Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure
that the jack will not damage surrounding truck
parts and adjust the jack position as required.
Rear Jacking Location (All)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409
6
NOTE: If the 2500/3500 bottle jack will not lower by
turning the dial (thumb wheel) by hand, it may be
necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the
jack.
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nuts toward the wheel on 1500/2500/3500 single
rear wheel (SRW) models. On 3500 dual rear wheel
models (DRW) the lug nuts are a two piece assembly
with a flat face. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid risk of
forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the
nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts
using a crisscross pattern. Correct nut tightness is 135 ft.
lbs. (183 N·m) torque for 1500/2500/3500 single rear
wheel (SRW) models and 145 ft. lbs. (197 N·m) for 3500
dual rear wheel models. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your dealer or at a service station.
410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the extra tire and
wheel in the places provided.
7. Install wheel center cap and remove wheel blocks. Do
not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the
spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the bottle
jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumb wheel) by
hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in
order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and
tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle
off the ground.
For 2500/3500 single rear wheel (SRW) models, use the
blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the hub cap off.
Insert the blade end into the pryoff notch and carefully
pop off the hub cap with a back and forth motion.
On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must
first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a
hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the
rear hub caps. Position the hook and pull out on the
ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel
skins can now be removed. For the front hub cap on 3500
models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry
the caps off. The wheel skin can now be removed.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411
6
CAUTION!
Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub cap.
Do not use a twisting motion when removing the
hub cap, damage to the hub cap finish may occur.
CAUTION!
The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pry
off notches. Make sure that the hook of the jack
handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch
before attempting to pull off.
You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the
wheel skins. Insert the flat tip completely and using a
back and forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this
procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.
Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When
replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the
lugnut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a
rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins
are firmly seated around the wheel.
8-Stud — Dual Rear Wheels
Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The lug
nuts are a two piece assembly. When the tires are being
rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add 2 drops
of oil at the interface between the hex and the washer.
412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the
inner and outer wheels. Align these slots when assem-
bling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the
inner wheel. The tires of both dual wheels must be
completely off the ground when tightening to insure
wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping.
Dual wheel models require a special heavy-duty lug nut
tightening adapter (included with the vehicle) to cor-
rectly tighten the lug nuts. Also, when it is necessary to
remove and install dual rear wheels, use a proper vehicle
lifting device.
NOTE: When installing a spare tire as part of a dual rear
wheel end combination, the tire diameter of the two
individual tires must be compared. If there is a significant
difference, the larger tire should be installed in a front
location. Correct direction of rotation for dual tire instal-
lations must also be observed.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413
6
These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows: 1. Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to a
snug fit.
2. Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the
torques listed in the table. Go through the sequence a
second time to verify that specific torque has been
achieved. Retighten to specifications at 100 miles (160
km) and after 500 miles (800 km).
It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued
to specifications at all times. Torque wheel stud nuts to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
Wheel Nuts
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi-
nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the
bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles
of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly
set. All nuts should first be firmly seated against the
414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
wheel. The nuts should then be tightened to recom-
mended torque. Tighten the nuts to final torque in
increments. Progress around the bolt circle, tightening
the nut opposite to the nut just previously tightened until
final torque is achieved. Recommended torques are
shown in the following chart.
Disc
Wheels
Type Nut Stud Size Torque
Ft. Lbs.
Torque
Newton
Meters
Cone 9/16-18 120-150 160-200
Flanged 9/16-18 130-160 190-220
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
NOTE: 1500 Standard and Quad Cab vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels cannot be stored under
the vehicle because the wheel retainer will not fit through
the wheel pilot hole. Secure the (flat) tire in the bed of the
truck, have the (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and
position it properly across the wheel opening.
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow
with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
Attach the wheel wrench to the extension tube. Rotate the
winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into place
against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate
until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click 3 or 4
times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire
several times to be sure it is firmly in place.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 415
6
HOISTING
A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking
locations, refer to the graphics that show jacking loca-
tions. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be
used on any other parts or the underbody.
CAUTION!
Never use a floor jack directly under the differential
housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle
may result.
JUMP-STARTING
You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or
towing. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis-
sion cannot be started this way and pushing or towing a
vehicle equipped with a manual transmission may over-
heat and damage the catalytic converter. Also, there is a
greater risk of an accident when a vehicle is being pushed
or towed. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this
procedure carefully.
416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.
Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or
allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes
in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immedi-
ately with large quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes.
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source that has a greater than 12 volt system, i.e. Do
not use a 24 volt power source.
1. Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets which might make an unintended electrical
contact.
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with-
out letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles, place the automatic transmission in Park or
the manual transmission in Neutral, and turn the ignition
OFF.
3. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
battery.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 417
6
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of
the discharge battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode.
•
During cold weather when temperatures are be-
low freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above
freezing point before attempting jump start.
418 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting
out the battery vent;
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the gear
selector rhythmically between DRIVE and REVERSE
(automatic transmissions) and between 1st and RE-
VERSE (manual transmissions), while applying slight
pressure to the accelerator.
In general, the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine is most effective. Racing the
engine or spinning the wheels, due to the frustration of
not freeing the vehicle, may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission selector in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will
minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 419
6
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
WARNING!
Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing
serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
the main structural members of the vehicle—not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws
applying to vehicles under tow must be observed.
420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4-Wheel- Drive Vehicles
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the transfer case while towing,
always use one of the following methods.
NOTE: The Transfer Case must be in the neutral posi-
tion, and the transmission must be in Park (Automatic
Transmission), or in gear (Manual Transmission) to tow a
4WD vehicle with one end of the vehicle raised.
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
2–Wheel- Drive Vehicles
Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the
transmission in Neutral and the ignition key in the OFF
position along with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on the ground. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (50
km/h) and distance must not exceed 15 miles (25 km).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (50 km/h) or for more
than 15 miles (25 km) can cause severe damage to the
transmission.
If the vehicle is to be towed faster than 30 mph (50 km/h)
or more than 15 miles (25 km) the vehicle must be towed
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground. It may also be towed on a flatbed or with the
front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a dolly.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 421
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment— 3.7L/4.7L ...........426
䡵 Engine Compartment— 5.7L ...............427
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) .........428
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................428
䡵 Dealer Service .........................430
䡵 Replacement Parts ......................431
䡵 Maintenance Procedures ..................431
▫ Engine Oil ..........................431
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................435
▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And
Tensioner ...........................435
▫ Spark Plugs .........................436
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................436
▫ Engine Fuel Filter .....................436
▫ Catalytic Converter ....................437
▫ Emission-Related Components ............439
▫ Maintenance Free Battery ................439
7
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............440
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check ............441
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints ..............441
▫ Steering Linkage — Inspection ............442
▫ Half-Shaft Constant Velocity Joints .........442
▫ Front Prop Shaft Lubrication — 2500/3500
(4X4) Models ........................443
▫ Body Lubrication .....................443
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ................444
▫ Windshield Washers ...................444
▫ Exhaust System ......................445
▫ Cooling System .......................446
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses .......449
▫ Brake System ........................450
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System ................451
▫ Clutch Linkage .......................452
▫ Rear Axle And 4X4 Front Driving Axle Fluid
Level ..............................452
▫ Transfer Case ........................453
▫ Manual Transmission ..................453
▫ Automatic Transmission ................454
▫ Front Wheel Bearings ..................457
▫ Selection Of Lubricating Grease ...........457
▫ Noise Control System Required Maintenance &
Warranty For 3500 2-Wheel Drive And 4-Wheel
Drive Models Over 10,000 Lbs. (4 535 Kg) Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating. ..................458
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................462
䡵 Integrated Power Module .................466
䡵 Vehicle Storage ........................469
䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs .................470
䡵 Bulb Replacement ......................470
▫ Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park And Turn
Lights .............................470
▫ Tail, Stop, Turn And Backup Lights .........474
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplight With Cargo
Light ..............................476
▫ Cab Top Clearance Lights — If Equipped ....477
▫ Tailgate ID Lights (Dual Rear Wheels) —
If Equipped .........................479
▫ Rear Light Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheel) –
If Equipped .........................480
▫ Side Marker Lights (Dual Rear Wheels) ......481
▫ Fog Lights ..........................482
䡵 Fluids And Capacities ...................483
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ........485
▫ Engine .............................485
▫ Chassis ............................486
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT— 3.7L/4.7L
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT— 5.7L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
7
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be driveable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” on could cause further damage to the emis-
sion control system. It could also affect fuel economy
and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before
any emissions tests can be performed.
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
For states which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL light will blink for approximately 5 sec-
onds and then remain on until the first engine crank or
the key is turned off. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
7
b. The MIL light will remain fully illuminated until the
first engine crank or the key is turned off. This means
that your vehicle’s OBD system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently
serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may
need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD system to update.
A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate
that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes
after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
7
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
top of the safe zone on these engines.
Change Engine Oil
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could dam-
age your engine.
Road conditions as well as your kind of driving affect the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following to determine if any apply to you:
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
•
Stop and go driving.
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 32°C (90°F)
•
Trailer towing
•
Heavy Loading
•
Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service)
•
Off-road or desert operation
•
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on schedule ⬙A⬙ of the ⬙Mainte-
nance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
Dusty Conditions
Driving through dust-laden air increases the problems of
keeping abrasive materials out of the engine. Under these
conditions, special attention should be given to the
engine air cleaner, the crankcase inlet air cleaner and the
crankcase ventilation system. Make sure that these units
are clean at all times. This will tend to reduce to a
minimum the amount of abrasive material that may enter
the engine.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacture only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395. Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the
specification MS-6395.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
7
Engine Oil Identification (API) Symbol
There is a symbol to aid you in selecting the proper
engine oil.
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacture only recommends
API Certified engine oils that
meet the requirements of
DaimlerChrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-6395. Use Mopar or an
equivalent oil meeting the specifi-
cation MS-6395.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
For 3.7L/4.7L engines SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recom-
mended for all operating temperatures. For the 5.7L
engine SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low
temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your
engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
For information on engine oil filler cap location, see the
Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
There are a number of engine oils being promoted as
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use
such a product, use only those oils that are API Certified
and meet the SAE viscosity standard. Follow the service
schedule that describes your driving type.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad-
ditives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tensioner
Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic
tensioner. No belt tension adjustments are required.
However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be
inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if re-
quired. See your authorized dealer for service.
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all
belts and tensioner should be checked for condition.
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks,
glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication
of damage which could result in belt failure. Low gen-
erator belt tension can cause battery failure.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
7
Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interfer-
ence between the belts and other engine components.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug, malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata-
lytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark
plugs, refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Informa-
tion” label in the engine compartment.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at
the intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you
drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe con-
ditions, the filter element should be inspected periodi-
cally and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on
Schedule “B”.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
fuel tank, frequent filter replacement may be necessary.
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
7
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex-
haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact any-
thing that can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Emission-Related Components
Positive Crankcase (PCV) Valve
Proper operation of the crankcase ventilation system
requires that the PCV valve be free of sticking or plug-
ging from deposits. Deposits can accumulate in the PCV
valve and passages with increasing mileage. Have the
PCV valve, hoses, and passages checked for proper
operation at the intervals specified. If the valve is
plugged or sticking, replace with a new valve— do not
attempt to clean the old PCV valve! Check the ventila-
tion hoses for indications of damage, weepage or plug-
ging with deposits. Replace if necessary.
Maintenance Free Battery
The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
7
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked (+) positive
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Also, if a “fast charger” is used while battery is in
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
NOTE: Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information
book for further warranty information.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.⬙
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
Front Suspension Ball Joints
4 x 2 Models
The ball joints and seals should be inspected whenever
the vehicle is serviced for other reasons.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
7
The ball joints originally supplied with the vehicle are
permanently lubricated at the factory and do not require
service. However, if the seals on the ball joints are
damaged, the joints should be replaced. Serviceable
replacement ball joints are available.
Front suspension ball joints should be replaced only by a
qualified service technician using tools specially de-
signed for this purpose. Damage to the joints and/or
suspension components may result if improper replace-
ment procedures are used.
If seals are damaged the ball joints should be replaced to
prevent leakage or contamination of the grease.
Steering Linkage — Inspection
Whenever the vehicle is hoisted, all steering linkage
joints should be inspected for evidence of damage. If
seals are damaged, parts should be replaced to prevent
leakage or contamination of the grease. Lubricate the
steering linkage regularly according to the “Maintenance
Schedule” in this manual.
Half-shaft Constant Velocity Joints
All four- wheel- drive 1500 models are equipped with
four constant velocity joints. Periodic lubrication of these
joints is not required. However, the joint boots should be
inspected for external leakage or damage periodically. If
external leakage or damage is evident, the joint boot and
grease should be replaced immediately. Continued op-
eration could result in failure of the joint due to water
and dirt contamination of the grease. This would require
complete replacement of the joint assembly. Refer to the
Service Manual for the detailed replacement procedure.
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Prop Shaft Lubrication — 2500/3500 (4X4)
Models
Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil
change listed in the appropriate Maintenance Schedule
for your vehicle (Schedule “A” and “B”). Use Mopar威
type MS-6560 (lithium based grease), or equivalent.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, tailgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Front Driveshaft Grease Fitting
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
7
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-
mulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield Washers
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should
be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not ra-
diator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reser-
voir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help
blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopar All
Weather Windshield Washer Solution, used with water as
directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces
the freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not
harmful to paint or trim.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
Exhaust System Rubber Isolator and Loop-Type
Hanger — If Equipped
Inspect surfaces whenever the vehicle is hoisted for
rubber to metal separation or deep cracks. SLIGHT
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
7
CRACKING DUE TO WEATHERING DOES NOT AD-
VERSELY AFFECT PERFORMANCE. If, however, exces-
sively deep localized cracks are present, or any part of the
exhaust system abnormally contacts the underbody hard-
ware, the isolator and/or hanger should be replaced.
Cooling System
Cooling System Maintenance
At the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedules
Section of the manual, the system should be drained,
flushed and filled.
Inspection
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant as specified.
Inspect the entire cooling system for leaks. Check the face
of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, or
other foreign matter. If dirty, clean the radiator core with
a garden hose. With the engine OFF, gently spray water
from the back of the radiator core.
For 3.7L, 4.7L, and 5.7L engines, check the coolant bottle
hoses for condition and tightness of the connections at
both the coolant bottle and radiator.
Coolant Level ( 3.7L, 4.7L, 5.7L Engines)
The coolant reserve system provides a quick visual
method of determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine idling, and warmed to the normal
operating temperature, the level of the coolant in the
coolant bottle should be between the fluid level marks.
Check the coolant level whenever the hood is raised.
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no longer a need to remove the coolant pressure cap
except for checking coolant freeze point or replacement
with new antifreeze coolant.
WARNING!
Never add coolant to the radiator when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove pressure cap to
cool an overheated engine! The coolant is under
pressure and severe scalding could result.
Drain, Flush And Refill
At intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled. Refer to
your dealer or consult a service manual for proper
procedures.
Adding Coolant
When adding coolant, or refilling the system, a minimum
solution of 50% recommended HOAT ethylene glycol
engine coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water should be
used. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are anticipated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE: It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing according to
the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle
is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
7
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, add the recommended concentration of
antifreeze and water to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
NOTE: Failure to follow the antifreeze concentration
and replacement recommendations, or failure to use
antifreeze formulated to prevent corrosion of all cooling
system metals, may result in radiator plugging, overheat-
ing, or cooling system leaks such as in core hole plugs.
WARNING!
Never add coolant to the radiator when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove pressure cap to
cool an overheated engine. The coolant is under
pressure and severe scalding could result.
Recommended Engine Coolant
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of coolants other than specified engine
coolant, may result in engine damage. If a non-
HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling sys-
tem in an emergency, it should be replaced with
the specified coolant as soon as possible.
•
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propy-
lene Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. Do not store ethylene glycol-based engine
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. Prevent ingestion by animals and
children. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Pressure Cap
The coolant pressure cap must be fully tightened to
prevent the loss of coolant and to insure that the coolant
will return to the radiator from the coolant bottle. The
pressure cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is
any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
WARNING!
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
radiator pressure cap are a safety precaution. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pres-
sure cap.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
heat source or moving component which may cause heat
damage or mechanical wear.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
7
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
Brake System
Power Disc Brakes (front and rear)
Disc brakes do not require periodic adjustment.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immedi-
ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic
reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a
“MAX” dot and an “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be
kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the
MAX mark, because leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the
correct Fluid type.
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or is unidentified as to specification,
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
WARNING!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
CAUTION!
Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.
Brake Hoses
Inspection should be performed whenever the brake
system is serviced or at intervals specified. Inspect hy-
draulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing or worn
spots. If there is any evidence of cracking, scuffing, or
worn spots, the hose should be replaced immediately!
Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place with
possible burst failure.
Clutch Hydraulic System
The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance-free
system. In the event of leakage or other malfunction, the
system must be replaced.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
7
Clutch Linkage
If the clutch pedal linkage begins to squeak or grunt, the
clutch pedal pivot bushings should be lubricated. Refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct
lubricant type.
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the
correct Fluid type. For normal service, periodic fluid level
checks are not required. When the vehicle is serviced for
other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly
should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected
inspect the fluid level.
This inspection should be made with the vehicle in a level
position. The fluid level should be even with the bottom
of the fill hole for the Manufacturer’s C205F HD Front
Axles. The fluid level should be 5/8” (16 mm) below on
9 1/4” Manufacturer’s Rear Axles.
For all 2500/3500 Model axles, the fluid level should be
1/4” ± 1/4” (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the
9.25” Front and 3/4”± 1/4” (19 mm ± 6.4 mm) on 10.5”
Rear axles. The 11.5” Rear Axle level should be 1/4” ±
1/4” (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole.
Drain and Refill
Vehicles operated in normal service do not have regularly
scheduled oil changes. If fluid has become contaminated
with water or to provide the correct viscosity grade, drain
and refill.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Limited-Slip Differentials in 1500 Model vehicles re-
quire that 4 oz. (118 ml) Mopar威 limited slip additive be
added to the gear lubricant. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants
and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. The Mopar威
limited slip additive should be added to the gear lubri-
cant whenever a fluid change is made.
Ram 2500/3500 Model Axles DO NOT REQUIRE any
limited slip oil additive (friction modifiers).
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler
plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the
filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
Manual Transmission
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the fill plug.
If the level of the lubricant is more than 1/4” (6.4 mm)
below the bottom of the filler hole while the vehicle is on
level ground, enough lubricant should be added to bring
the level to the bottom of the filler hole.
Lubricant Selection G238 (6-Speed Manual
Transmission — If Equipped)
This transmission is filled with manual transmission
fluid at the factory. This fluid does not require periodic
changing. If it is necessary to add or change fluid in this
transmission refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type. This is the only lubricant
recommended for use in the Getrag 238 transmission.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
7
Lubricant Selection G56 (6-Speed Manual
Transmission — If Equipped)
This transmission is filled with manual transmission
fluid at the factory. This fluid does not require periodic
changing. If it is necessary to add or change fluid in this
transmission refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type. This is the only lubricant
recommended for use in the Getrag G56 transmission.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be checked when the engine is
fully warmed up and the fluid in the transmission is at
normal operating temperature. Operation of the trans-
mission with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce
the life of the transmission and of the fluid. Check the
fluid level whenever the vehicle is serviced.
Fluid Level Check – 45RFE/545RFE/42RLE
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature 82°C (180°F). This occurs after at
least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating
temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be-
tween the fingertips.
To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
the following procedure must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in P (Park).
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat-
ing temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait
a minimum of two (2) minutes for the oil to fully drain
into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room tem-
perature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
normal operating temperature.
CAUTION!
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading.
7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
7
Selection Of Lubricant
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type. It is important that the transmission fluid be
maintained at the prescribed level using the recom-
mended fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
Automatic Transmission Fluid and Filter Change
It is important that proper lubricant is used in the
transmission. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
The fluid and filter(s) should be changed as specified in
the Maintenance Schedule (Section 8).
NOTE: If the transmission is disassembled for any
reason, the fluid and filter(s) should be changed.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives to the transmission. Exception to
this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting
fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers should be
avoided, since they may adversely affect seals.
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Wheel Bearings
Front wheel bearings for all Dodge Ram Trucks are
sealed-for-life. They do not require greasing or seal
replacement. In some instances, these bearings will
“purge” excess grease and the bearing will look slightly
wet. This is normal. Periodic inspection for excess play is
recommended.
Rear Wheel Bearings — Manufacturer’s Axles
These bearings are normally considered permanently
lubricated. Cleaning and repacking is required only
when axle shafts are removed or in case of extreme water
or dust contamination.
Selection of Lubricating Grease
The National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI) has
developed a symbol (Certification Mark) to aid the
vehicle owner in the proper selection of grease for the
lubrication of wheel bearings and chassis components.
This symbol (an example is shown below) is located on
the grease container and identifies the application and
quality of the grease.
There are two groups
identified, those for wheel
bearings (Letter “G”) and
those for chassis (Letter
“L”) lubrication. Perfor-
mance categories within
these groups result in dual
letter designations for
each group. The letter des-
ignations shown in the ex-
ample are the highest
quality level available and when combined as shown can
be used for both wheel bearing and chassis lubrication.
Use only those greases that have the NLGI symbol on the
container along with the proper quality level for your
application.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
7
Noise Control System Required Maintenance &
Warranty For 3500 2-Wheel Drive and 4-Wheel
Drive models over 10,000 lbs. (4 535 kg) Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating.
All vehicles built over 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg) Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating and manufactured for sale and use in the
United States are required to comply with the Federal
Government’s Exterior Noise Regulations. These vehicles
can be identified by the Noise Emission Control Label
located in the operator’s compartment.
Required Maintenance for Noise Control Systems
The following maintenance services must be performed
every 6 months or 6,000 miles (9 600 km), whichever
comes first, to assure proper operation of the noise
control systems. In addition, inspection and service
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
should be performed anytime a malfunction is observed
or suspected. Proper maintenance of the entire vehicle
will help the effectiveness of the noise control systems.
Air Cleaner Assembly
Inspect air cleaner housing for proper assembly and fit.
Make certain that the air cleaner is properly positioned
and the cover is tight. Check all hoses leading to the
cleaner for tightness. The gasket between the air cleaner
housing and throttle body must be intact and in good
condition. The engine air cleaner filter must also be clean
and serviced according to the instructions outlined in the
appropriate maintenance schedule.
Tampering with Noise Control System Prohibited
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing
thereof: (1) the removal or rendering inoperative by any
person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair, or
replacement, of any device or element of design incorpo-
rated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate
purchaser or while it is in use, or (2) the use of the vehicle
after such device or element of design has been removed
or rendered inoperative by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are
the acts listed below.
AIR CLEANER
•
Removal of the air cleaner.
•
Inverting the air cleaner lid.
•
Removal of the air ducting.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
•
Removal or rendering inoperative exhaust system
components including the muffler or tailpipe.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
7
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
•
Removal or rendering inoperative the fan clutch.
•
Removal of the fan shroud.
Noise Emission Warranty
The manufacturer warrants that this vehicle as manufac-
tured by the manufacturer, was designed, built and
equipped to conform at the time it left the manufacturers
control with all applicable U.S. EPA Noise Control Regu-
lations.
This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built and
equipped by the manufacturer, and is not limited to any
particular part, component or system of the vehicle
manufactured by the manufacturer. Defects in design,
assembly or in any part, component or system of the
vehicle as manufactured by the manufacturer, which, at
the time it left the manufacturers control, caused noise
emissions to exceed Federal standards, are covered by
this warranty for the life of the vehicle.
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log Insert Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to the
mileage at which service was performed.
MILES 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000 42,000 48,000
KILOMETERS 9 600 19 000 29 000 36 000 48 000 58 000 67 000 77 000
Exhaust system-inspect
Air cleaner assembly-inspect
ODOMETER READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
MILES 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000
KILOMETERS 87 000 96 000 106 000 116 000 126 000 135 000 145 000 154 000
Exhaust system-inspect
Air cleaner assembly-inspect
ODOMETER READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461
7
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear
water.
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and
Tar Remover to remove.
462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To
remove heavy soil, use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select
a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes.
Only Mopar cleaners are recommended. Do not use
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463
7
oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the
wheels’ protective finish.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-
type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window
equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter
window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch
the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft tissue.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465
7
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE
An integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
tridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse
and component may be stamped on the inside cover
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on
the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
1 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet Console
2 20 Amp
Yellow
CCN Door Locks/
BTSI
3 20 Amp
Yellow
Spare
4 20 Amp
Yellow
Spare
5 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Sunroof
6 10 Amp
Red
OCM/VIST Fan/
Wastegate
7 15 Amp
Blue
Reverse Lockout Sole-
noid Battery (SRT-10
Only)
Integrated Power Module Location
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
8 10 Amp
Red
Heated Mirrors
9 30 Amp
Pink
Off Road Module
Power
10 5 Amp
Orange
Trx-Off Rd Pkg Sen
(Gas Engine Only)
11 20 Amp
Yellow
IOD-CNN/Radio/
Under Hood Lamp/
WCM/SDARS/HFM
12 30 Amp
Pink
Electric Brake
13 25 Amp
Natural
Power-Battery
RWAL/ABS Module
Feed
14 15 Amp
Blue
Park Lamps Left
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
15 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Park Lamps
16 15 Amp
Blue
Park Lamps Right
17 15 Amp
Blue
Spare
18 40 Amp
Green
ABS Pump
19 30 Amp
Pink
Trailer Tow
20 10 Amp
Red
ORC2
21 10 Amp
Red
ORC Preset Carrier
22 2 Amp
Gray
IGN Switch Feed
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467
7
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
23 10 Amp
Red
ECM/WCM/HVC
24 20 Amp
Blue
Subwoofer Amplifier
(SRT-10 Only)
25 10 Amp
Red
Power Mirror
26 20 Amp
Yellow
Brake Switch/
CHMSL/Stop Lamp
27 40 Amp
Green
Power Seats
28 10 Amp
Red
Power Run/Start-
NCC/WCM/ABS/
RWAL
29 10 Amp
Red
Switches/EC Mirror/
Smart Bar
30 15 Amp
Blue
Spare
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
31 10 Amp
Red
PCM/Transfer Case
Brake
32 10 Amp
Red
HVAC/Ajustable
Pedals/Heated Seats
Switch LED/Exhaust
Brake
33 10 Amp
Red
Power-IGN Run Misc
34 10 Amp
Red
Spare
35 15 Amp
Blue
CNN Illumination
36 25 Amp
Natural
Audio_Amplifier
37 15 Amp
Blue
Spare
468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
38 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet IP
39 10 Amp
Red
Sunroof/Seatbelt Ten-
sioner
40 20 Amp
Yellow
Cigar Lighter
41 25 Amp
Natural
Spare
42 30 Amp
Pink
Diesel PCM (Diesel
Only)
1. Disconnect the battery negative (-) cable before remov-
ing the cover.
2. Use specified fuses only.
3. Always properly reinstall the cover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to mini-
mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
•
Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw fuse (I.O.D.) fuse
located in the Integrated Power Module, located in the
engine compartment. The I.O.D. cavity includes a
snap-in retainer that allows the fuse to be discon-
nected, without removing it from the fuse block.
•
The electronic shift transfer case should be placed in
the 4HI mode and kept in this position to minimize the
battery drain.
•
As an alternative to the above steps you may, discon-
nect the negative cables from both batteries.
NOTE: When reinstalling the IOD fuse, the gages in the
Instrument Cluster will do a full sweep, when the
ignition key is cycled to RUN. This is a normal condition.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469
7
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Inside Bulb No.
Overhead Console Lights ............... TS212-2
Dome Light............................ 7679
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
LIGHT BULBS — Outside Bulb No.
Back-Up .............................. 3057
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp ............. 912
Fog Lamp ........................... 9006LL
Headlamp (Halogen) ..................... H13
Side Marker Bulb ....................... W5W
Park & Turn Signal ................... 3157NAK
Rear License Plate Lamp ................... 168
Rear Cargo Light......................... 912
Tail & Stop ............................ 3057
Cab Clearance Lights ...................... 168
Dual Rear Wheel Sidemarker Light ............ 168
Dual Rear Wheel Tailgate ID Lights (3) ......... 168
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park and Turn Lights
CAUTION!
This is a halogen bulb. Avoid touching the glass
with your fingers. Reduced bulb life will result.
470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Open the hood
2. Remove the two (2) bolts from the front of the head-
light housing.
3. Remove the plug from the inner fender well and
remove the nut through the access hole.
Front Headlight Housing Bolts
Inner Fender Plug
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471
7
4. Pull the housing out from the fender to allow room to
disconnect the electrical connectors.
NOTE: For easier removal, pull the headlight assembly
straight forward, applying the greatest amount of force to
the outer edge of the headlight assembly.
Rear Headlight Housing Nut Access
Headlight Removal
472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Unlock and pull connector straight from the base of
the headlight halogen bulb.
6. Twist connector on turn signal/park light bulb
1
⁄
4
turn
and remove connector and bulb from housing.
7. Remove housing from vehicle with headlight halogen
bulb in housing.
8. Twist the headlight halogen bulb
1
⁄
4
turn and remove
headlight bulb from the housing.
9. Replace headlight or turn signal bulb. Do not touch
the headlight halogen bulb.
10. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-
ing.
Bulb Removal
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473
7
Tail, Stop, Turn and Backup Lights
1. Remove the two (2) screws that pass through the bed
sheetmetal.
2. Pull the housing straight out from the body, with a
quick motion, to separate the housing from the body. If
not pulled straight, locators may be damaged.
474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push the red lock slide in on the connector and remove
the housing from the vehicle.
4. Remove the four (4) screws from the bulb strip in the
housing.
5. Pull the appropriate bulb straight from the bulb strip.
•
Top Bulb: Park/Turn/Hazard
•
Center Bulb: Stop/Park/Sidemarker
•
Bottom Bulb: Backup Lights
6. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-
ing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475
7
7. While holding the taillight firmly in place, fasten the
top screw first.
Center High-Mounted Stoplight With Cargo Light
1. Remove the two (2) screws holding the housing/lens
to the body as shown.
2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wir-
ing harness to the body.
3. Turn desired bulb socket
1
⁄
4
turn and remove socket
and bulb from housing.
4. Pull desired bulb straight from the socket.
476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
•
Inside Bulb: Center High Mount Stop Lamp
5. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-
ing.
Cab Top Clearance Lights — If Equipped
1. Remove the two screws from the top of the light.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477
7
2. Rotate the socket
1
⁄
4
turn and pull it from the light
assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight from it’s socket and replace.
478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tailgate ID Lights (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped
1. Remove the two screws and housing and access the
bulb sockets from the rear.
2. Turn socket
1
⁄
4
turn counterclockwise to access the
bulb.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479
7
3. Pull bulb straight out from socket.
4. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-
ing.
Rear Light Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheel) – If
Equipped
1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access
to the bulb sockets.
2. Turn the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise to access
the bulb.
480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
4. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-
ing.
Side Marker Lights (Dual Rear Wheels)
1. Push rearward on the side marker light assembly.
2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
3. Turn socket
1
⁄
4
turn counterclockwise and remove from
assembly to access the bulb.
4. Pull bulb straight out from socket.
5. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-
ing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481
7
Fog Lights
1. Reach under the vehicle, unlock and twist connector
counterclockwise
1
⁄
4
turn and remove connector and bulb
from housing.
2. Pull bulb straight from the connector.
3. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-
ing.
482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel
3.7L/4.7L, 87 Octane
5.7L, 89 Octane
1500 Shortbed Models 26 gal. 98L
1500 Longbed Models 35 gal. 132L
1500 Shortbed Models 34 gal. 128L
2500 Shortbed Models 34 gal. 128L
2500 Longbed Models 35 gal. 132L
3500 Shortbed Models 34 gal. 128L
3500 Longbed Models 35 gal. 132L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483
7
U.S. Metric
Engine Oil (with filter)
3.7L Engine V-6, SAE 5W-30, API Certified 5.0 qts. 4.7L
4.7L Engine V-8, SAE 5W-30, API Certified 6.0 qts. 5.7L
5.7L Engine V-8, SAE 5W-20, API Certified 7.0 qts. 6.6L
Cooling System
3.7L (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula)
17 qts. 16L
4.7L (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula)
17 qts. 16L
5.7L (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula)
18.7 qts. 17.7L
484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-
ganic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
3.7/4.7L Engine Oil Use SAE 5W-30, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395.
5.7L Engine Oil Use SAE 5W-20, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Filter Mopar威 Engine Oil Filter, P/N 5281090 or equivalent.
Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com-
partment.
Fuel Selection (all except 5.7L) 87 Octane, (R+M)/2 Method
Fuel Selection (5.7L) 89 Octane, (R+M)/2 Method, Mid-Grade Preferred (87 Octane acceptable)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485
7
Chassis
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Automatic Transmission Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
NVG 246 Automatic Transfer Case Only Mopar威 PN 05179014AA, NVG 246 Automatic Transmission Fluid or
equivalent.
Manaul Transmission Fluid (G238) Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission Fluid (G-56) Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Clutch Linkage Multipurpose Grease, NLGI Grade 2 E.P. or equivalent.
1500 Model Front Axle (4X4) GL-5 SAE 75W-90 (MS-9763) or equivalent.
1500 Model Rear Axle Mopar威 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985). Limited-Slip
Rear Axles on 1500 Models Require the addition of 118 ml (4 oz.) Mo-
par威 limited slip additive or equivalent.
2500/3500 Model Front and Rear Axle Synthetic, GL-5 SAE, 75W-90 or equivalent. Limited-Slip 10.5/11.5 inch
Rear Axles DO NOT REQUIRE a limited slip additive.
Brake Master Cylinder Mopar威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recom-
mended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance ........488
䡵 Maintenance Schedules ...................488
▫ Schedule “B” ........................491
▫ Schedule “A” ........................503
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type in this section (Section 8) must be done at the times
or mileages specified to assure the continued proper
functioning of the emission control system. These, and all
other maintenance services included in this manual,
should be done to provide best vehicle performance and
reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for
vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty
areas and very short trip driving.
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated
under one or more of the following conditions that are
listed below and at the beginning of the schedule.
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
•
Stop and go driving.
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
•
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32°C).
•
Trailer towing.
•
Snowplowing.
488 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
•
Heavy Loading.
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
•
Off-road or desert operation.
•
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace your engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first and follow
schedule “B” of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of
this manual.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule ⬙B⬙.
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched-
ule ⬙B⬙.
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi-
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 489
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required. When refilling the washer fluid reservoir,
take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel
and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help blade
performance.
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant bottle, brake master
cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
•
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Lubricate Drivetrain/Steering/Suspension Grease Fit-
tings (if equipped)
•
Inspect the exhaust system.
•
Inspect the brake hoses.
•
Inspect the CV joints/U— joints (if equipped) and
front suspension components.
•
Check the automatic transmission fluid level.
•
Check the manual transmission fluid level.
•
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
•
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4).
490 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Schedule “B”
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions.
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
•
Stop and go driving.
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
•
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
•
Trailer towing.
•
Snowplowing.
•
Heavy Loading.
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
•
Off-road or desert operation.
•
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace your engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first and follow
schedule “B” of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of
this manual.
NOTE: If none of these apply to you, then change your
engine oil at every interval shown on schedule ⬙A⬙ of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
SCHEDULE “B” 491
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000
(Kilometers) (5 000) (10 000) (15 000) (20 000) (25 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval
shown or 3 months, whichever comes first.
X X XXX
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500,
4X4).
X X XXX
Rotate tires. X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
XX
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) mod-
els only.
XX
Change rear axle fluid. X
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
X
492 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000
(Kilometers) (30 000) (35 000) (40 000) (45 000) (50 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval shown or
3 months, whichever comes first.
XXXXX
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4). X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. X X X
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models only. X X X
Change rear axle fluid. X
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. X
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary. ** X
SCHEDULE “B” 493
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 33,000 36,000 39,000 42,000 45,000
(Kilometers) (55 000) (60 000) (65 000) (70 000) (75 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval
shown or 3 months, whichever comes first.
X X XXX
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500,
4X4).
X X XXX
Rotate tires. X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
XX
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) mod-
els only.
XX
Change rear axle fluid. X
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
X
494 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 48,000 51,000 54,000 57,000 60,000
(Kilometers) (80 000) (85 000) (90 000) (95 000) (100 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval
shown or 3 months, whichever comes first.
X X XXX
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500,
4X4).
X X XXX
Rotate tires. X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
XXX
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) mod-
els only.
XXX
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, or
102,000 miles (170 000 km) whichever comes first.
X
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4). X
Change rear axle fluid. X
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X
Change 6-spd manual transmission fluid 2500/3500
models only.
X
SCHEDULE “B” 495
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 48,000 51,000 54,000 57,000 60,000
(Kilometers) (80 000) (85 000) (90 000) (95 000) (100 000)
Inspect brake linings. X X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
X
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect and replace ignition cables if necessary. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary. ** X
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and
change main sump filter*.
X
496 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 63,000 66,000 69,000 72,000 75,000
(Kilometers) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000) (125 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval
shown or 3 months, whichever comes first.
X X XXX
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500,
4X4).
X X XXX
Rotate tires. X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
XX
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) mod-
els only.
XX
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
X
Change rear axle fluid. X
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re-
quired. (3.7L/4.7L/5.7L).
X
SCHEDULE “B” 497
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 78,000 81,000 84,000 87,000 90,000
(Kilometers) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000) (150 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval shown or
3 months, whichever comes first.
XXXXX
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4). X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. X X X
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models only. X X X
Change rear axle fluid. X
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. X
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary. ** X
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required (3.7L/
4.7L/5.7L).****
X
498 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 93,000 96,000 99,000 102,000
(Kilometers) (155 000) (160 000) (165 000) (170 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval shown
or 3 months, whichever comes first.
XXXX
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4). X X X X
Rotate tires. X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. X X
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models only. X X
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at 60
months.
X
Inspect brake linings. X
SCHEDULE “B” 499
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 105,000 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000
(Kilometers) (175 000) (180 000) (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter at in-
terval shown or 3 months, whichever comes
first.
X X XXXX
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/
3500, 4X4).
X X XXXX
Rotate tires. X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and cor-
rect stowage.
XXX
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4)
models only.
XXX
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4). X
Change rear axle fluid. X X
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X X
Change 6-spd manual transmission fluid
2500/3500 models only.
X
Inspect brake linings. X X
500 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 105,000 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000
(Kilometers) (175 000) (180 000) (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000)
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary.
XX
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect and replace ignition cables if neces-
sary.
X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary. ** X
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if
required (3.7L/4.7L/5.7L).
XX
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid
and change main sump and spin-on cooler
return filter (if equipped)*.
X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 120
months if not replaced at 102,000 miles (170
000 km).
X
SCHEDULE “B” 501
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
* This applies only if the vehicle is used for frequent
trailer towing, snowplowing, fleet vehicle or commercial
service.
** This maintenance is recommended by the manufac-
turer to the owner, but not required to maintain the
emissions warranty.
**** This maintenance is not required if the belt was
previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
502 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Schedule “A”
Miles 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000
(Kilometers) (10 000) (20 000) (30 000) (40 000) (50 000)
[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
X X XXX
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500,
4X4).
X X XXX
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) mod-
els only.
X X XXX
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
X
Replace spark plugs. X
SCHEDULE “A” 503
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 36,000 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000
(Kilometers) (60 000) (70 000) (80 000) (90 000) (100 000) (110 000)
[Months] [36] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and cor-
rect stowage.
X X XXXX
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/
3500, 4X4).
X X XXXX
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4)
models only.
X X XXXX
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60
months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles (170
000 km).
X
Inspect brake linings. X X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary.
X
504 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 36,000 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000
(Kilometers) (60 000) (70 000) (80 000) (90 000) (100 000) (110 000)
[Months] [36] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66]
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary. ** X
Inspect and replace ignition cables if neces-
sary.
X
SCHEDULE “A” 505
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000
(Kilometers) (120 000) (130 000) (140 000) (150 000) (160 000)
[Months] [72] [78] [84] [90] [96]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. X X X X X
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models only. X X X X X
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4). X X X X X
Inspect brake linings. X X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. X
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary. ** X
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required (3.7L/
4.7L/5.7L).
X
506 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 102,000 108,000 114,000 120,000
(Kilometers) (170 000) (180 000) (190 000) (200 000)
[Months] [102] [108] [114] [120]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. X X X X
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4). X
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4). X X X X
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at 60
months.
X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 120 months, if not
replaced at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
X
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models only. X X X X
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required
(3.7L/4.7L/5.7L).****
XX
Inspect and replace ignition cables if necessary. X
SCHEDULE “A” 507
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 102,000 108,000 114,000 120,000
(Kilometers) (170 000) (180 000) (190 000) (200 000)
[Months] [102] [108] [114] [120]
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. X
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV Valve, replace as necessary. ** X
** This maintenance is recommended by the manufac-
turer to the owner, but not required to maintain the
emissions warranty.
**** This maintenance is not required if the belt was
previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
508 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle ..............................510
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ............510
▫ Prepare A List ........................510
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............510
䡵 If You Need Assistance ...................510
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) .....513
䡵 Mopar威 Parts .........................513
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects ..................513
▫ In Canada ..........................513
䡵 Publication Order Forms ..................514
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades ........................515
▫ Treadwear ..........................515
▫ Traction Grades ......................515
▫ Temperature Grades ...................516
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
pointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
510 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
•
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Dealership name
•
Vehicle identification number
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 511
9
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
512 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.NHTSA.gov. or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Washington DC
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 513
9
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
514 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call Toll Free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
•
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories estab-
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 515
9
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
516 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adding Fuel ........................... 360
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ..............436,459
Air Conditioner Maintenance ............... 440
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .............440,441
Air Conditioning System ................ 277,440
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control ........280
Air Pressure, Tires .................... 344,352
Airbag .......................... 43,50,80,86
Airbag Light ......................53,109,220
Airbag On/Off Switch ................... 50,86
Airbag, Side ............................ 89
Alarm (Security Alarm) ................. 26,222
Alignment and Balance ................... 351
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ............. 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................269
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..............448,483
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............. 331
Anti-Lock Warning Light ............... 224,332
Anti-Theft System ..................... 26,222
Appearance Care ........................ 462
Ashtray ............................... 194
Automatic Transmission
Adding Fluid .........................455
Fluid and Filter Changes ................. 456
Fluid Level Check ......................454
Fluid Type ........................ 456,486
Shift Indicator ........................222
Shifting ............................. 299
Special Additives ...................... 456
Axle Fluid .......................... 452,486
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) ...............452
Ball Joints .............................441
Battery ............................... 439
Emergency Starting .....................416
Saving Feature (Protection) ............... 163
Bearings ..............................457
518 INDEX
Belts, Drive ............................435
Belts, Seat ............................ 31,68
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............443
B-Pillar Location ........................ 339
Brake Fluid ............................486
Brake System ........................330,450
Anti-Lock (ABS) .......................331
Disc Brakes .......................... 450
Hoses .............................. 451
Master Cylinder .......................450
Parking ............................. 328
Warning Light ........................224
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle .......106
Bulb Replacement ....................... 470
Bulbs, Light ............................ 470
Cab Top Clearance Lights .................. 477
Calibration, Compass .....................180
Camper ............................... 209
Capacities, Fluid ........................ 483
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ..........................434
Power Steering ........................ 441
Car Washes ............................ 462
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...........108,211,360
Cargo Light ............................ 165
Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance .........272
Catalytic Converter ....................365,437
CD (Compact Disc) Player ............ 228,236,250
Cellular Phone ..........................121
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............476
Center Lap Belts .......................40,77
Center Seat Storage Compartment .........199,200
Certification Label ....................... 367
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................ 336
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ............... 223
Child Restraint ......................56,93,94
INDEX 519
10
Child Restraint Tether Anchors ........ 60,63,97,101
Child Seat ....................... 56,62,94,100
Cigar Lighter ........................... 194
Climate Control .........................274
Clock ..................... 227,230,238,252,265
Clutch ............................... 451
Clutch Linkage Maintenance ................452
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............273
Compact Spare Tire ...................... 347
Compass .............................. 180
Compass Calibration .....................180
Compass Variance .......................182
Computer, Trip/Travel .................... 176
Console, Overhead .......................175
Contract, Service ........................ 512
Converter, Catalytic ......................365
Cooling System ......................... 446
Coolant Capacity ...................... 483
Coolant Level .........................446
Disposal of Used Coolant ................ 449
Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................447
Inspection ...........................446
Radiator Cap ...................... 446,449
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...... 448,483,485
Temperature Gauge ..................... 221
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .............. 172
Cup Holder ............................ 195
Customer Assistance ..................... 510
Data Recorder, Event .................... 54,91
Daytime Running Lights ...................164
Dealer Service .......................... 430
Defroster, Rear Window .............. 119,280,283
Defroster, Windshield ..................275,278
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ................. 168
Differential, Limited-Slip ..................327
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ................. 454
520 INDEX
Power Steering ........................ 441
Disc Brakes ............................450
Disposal
Engine Oil ........................... 449
Door Ajar .............................227
Door Locks ............................. 17
Door Opener, Garage ..................... 183
Drive Belts ............................ 435
Drive Shaft Universal Joints ................ 442
Dual Rear Wheels ..................... 355,412
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) ......266
E-85 Fuel ............................. 363
Electric Rear Window Defrost .........119,280,283
Electrical Power Outlets ................... 192
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 172
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case ........312,320
Emergency Brake ........................ 328
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ............... 419
Hazard Warning Flasher ................. 398
Jacking ............................. 405
Jump Starting .........................416
Tow Hooks ..........................420
Towing .............................420
Emission Control System Maintenance .........488
Emission Related Components ..............439
Engine ............................426,427
Air Cleaner .......................... 436
Break-In Recommendations ...............106
Compartment Identification ............ 426,427
Coolant (Antifreeze) ................. 448,485
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................360
Flooded, Starting ...................... 297
Fuel Requirements .....................483
Oil ........................... 431,483,485
Oil Filler Cap .........................434
INDEX 521
10
Oil Selection .......................433,483
Oil Synthetic .........................434
Temperature Gauge ..................... 221
Equipment Identification Plate ..............395
Ethylene Glycol Antifreeze .................448
Event Data Recorder ....................54,91
Exhaust Gas Caution ............. 108,211,360,445
Exhaust System ......................108,445
Exterior Lighting ........................164
Filters
Air Cleaner ........................ 436,459
Engine Fuel .......................... 436
Engine Oil ........................ 435,485
Engine Oil Disposal .................... 435
Flashers
Turn Signal ..........................166
Flat Tire Stowage .....................404,415
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range ........................ 365
Engine Oil ........................... 364
Fuel Requirements .....................363
Maintenance ..........................365
Replacement Parts ..................... 365
Starting .............................364
Flooded Engine Starting ...................297
Fluid, Brake ........................... 486
Fluid Capacities .........................483
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ................. 454
Power Steering ........................ 441
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .......... 485
Fog Lights ....................... 165,225,482
Fold Flat Load Floor .....................204
Four Wheel Drive ....................... 308
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .................. 398
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................... 419
522 INDEX
Front Axle (Differential) ................... 452
Front Wheel Bearings .....................457
Fuel ................................. 356
Filter ...............................436
Gauge .............................. 226
Octane Rating ......................356,485
Requirements ......................356,483
Tank Capacity ........................ 483
Fuel, Flexible ............. See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuses ................................466
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) ...........183
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ..................361
Gasoline (Fuel) .........................356
Gasoline, Reformulated ................... 357
Gauges ...............................219
Coolant Temperature .................... 221
Fuel ................................ 226
Oil Pressure .......................... 220
Speedometer .........................220
Tachometer .......................... 219
Voltmeter ............................219
Gear Ranges ........................299,305
Glass Cleaning .......................... 465
Grocery Bag Retainer ..................... 204
Gross Axle Weight Rating .................. 371
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ................370
GVWR ...............................367
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) ............. 121
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................398
Head Restraints ......................... 147
Headlights ............................ 470
High Beam ........................... 167
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........167
Lights On Reminder ....................165
Passing .............................166
Switch .............................. 164
INDEX 523
10
Heated Mirrors .................... 119,280,283
Heated Seats ...........................158
Heater ...............................277
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 167
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................ 372
Hoisting .............................. 416
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 183
Hood Release ..........................160
Hoses ................................449
Hub Caps .............................411
Ignition .............................14,294
Key ............................... 12,14
Lock ................................14
Infant Restraint ...................... 56,93,94
Inflation Pressure Tires ....................352
Inside Rearview Mirror .................... 116
Instrument Cluster .................... 218,219
Instrument Panel and Controls .............. 217
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ............. 465
Integrated Power Module .................. 466
Interior Appearance Care .................. 464
Interior Lights ..........................162
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ........... 168
Introduction .............................4
Jack Location ........................... 399
Jack Operation .......................... 405
Jump Starting .......................... 416
Key, Replacement ........................13
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................12
Key-In Reminder ......................... 12
Keyless Entry System ...................... 22
Keys ................................ 12,16
Knee Bolster ............................ 43
524 INDEX
Lane Change and Turn Signals .............. 166
Lap Belts ............................40,77
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..................... 31,68
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) ..... 60,97
Life of Tires ............................ 350
Lights ............................. 109,161
Airbag ..........................53,91,220
Anti-Lock Warning ..................224,332
Brake Warning ........................ 224
Bulb Replacement ......................470
Cap Top Clearance ..................... 477
Cargo .............................. 165
Center Mounted Stop ...................476
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) ........ 223
Courtesy/Reading .....................176
Cruise .............................. 227
Daytime Running ......................164
Dual Wheel Assembly Rear ...............479
Fog .......................... 165,225,482
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator ...............312
Hazard Warning Flasher ................. 398
Headlights ...........................164
High Beam ........................167,220
High Beam Indicator .................... 220
High Beam/Low Beam Select .............167
Instrument Cluster .....................219
Intensity Control .......................162
Interior .......................... 162,176
Lights On Reminder ....................165
Passing .............................166
Seat Belt Reminder ..................... 220
Service .............................. 470
Side Marker .......................... 481
Transfer Case ......................... 312
Transmission Warning ...................226
Turn Signal ..................166,219,470,474
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....219
INDEX 525
10
Limited-Slip Differential ................ 327,453
Loading Vehicle .........................367
Tires ...............................339
Locks ................................. 17
Child Protection ........................21
Door ................................17
Ignition .............................. 14
Keys ................................12
Power Door ...........................18
Steering Wheel ......................... 14
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) ............................ 60,97
Lubricants .............................457
Lubrication, Body ....................... 443
Lug Nuts .............................410
Lumbar Support ........................148
Maintenance ...........................430
Maintenance Free Battery ..................439
Maintenance Procedures ................... 431
Maintenance Schedule ....................488
Schedule “A” .........................503
Schedule “B” ......................... 491
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .....429
Manual, Service .........................514
Manual Transmission ...............304,306,453
Fluid Level Check ......................453
Lubricant Selection ............... 453,454,486
Shift Speeds .......................... 305
Mirrors ...............................116
Automatic Dimming ....................117
Electric Powered ....................... 118
Outside ............................. 117
Rearview ............................116
Trailer Towing ......................119,381
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ............. 7
Mopar Parts .........................431,513
Multi-Displacement Engine System ........... 334
526 INDEX
Multi-Function Control Lever ............... 166
Noise Control
Maintenance ..........................458
Tampering Prohibited ................458,459
Noise Emission Warranty .................. 460
Occupant Restraints .....................30,67
Occupant Restraints
(1500 Standard and Quad Cab Only) ...........30
Occupant Restraints (2500/3500/Mega Cab Only) . . 67
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............356
Odometer .......................... 222,226
Trip .............................222,226
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) ............ 394
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ............ 394
Oil, Engine .........................431,485
Capacity ............................ 483
Change Interval ....................... 432
Dipstick ............................. 431
Disposal ............................435
Filter ............................ 435,485
Filter Disposal ........................ 435
Identification Logo .....................434
Materials Added to ..................... 434
Pressure Gauge .......................220
Recommendation ................... 433,483
Synthetic ............................ 434
Viscosity .......................... 434,483
Onboard Diagnostic System ................428
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) ...........183
Operating Precautions .................... 428
Outside Rearview Mirrors .................. 117
Overdrive ............................. 301
Overdrive OFF Switch ....................301
Overhead Console .................... 175,176
Overhead Travel Information Center .......... 176
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .......... 514
INDEX 527
10
Parking Brake .......................... 328
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch ...........50,86
Passing Light ...........................166
Pedals, Adjustable .......................170
Phone, Cellular .........................121
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) ............121
Pickup Box ............................207
Placard, Tire and Loading Information .........339
Positive Crankcase Valve ..................439
Power
Distribution Center .....................466
Door Locks ...........................18
Mirrors ............................. 118
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........192
Seats ............................149,151
Sliding Rear Window .................... 29
Steering .......................... 333,441
Sunroof .............................189
Windows ............................. 28
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 486
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ............42,79
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ........................... 40,78
Programmable Electronic Features ......... 185,188
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................185,188
Radial Ply Tires .........................346
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ....... 446,449
Radio Operation ................... 228,236,250
Radio Remote Controls .................... 270
Radio, Satellite ....................... 265,266
Radio (Sound Systems) .............. 228,236,250
Rear Axle (Differential) .................... 452
Rear Seat, Folding ....................153,155
Rear Wheel Bearings .....................457
Reclining Front Seats ..................146,147
Reclining Rear Seats ......................153
528 INDEX
Recorder, Event Data .................... 54,91
Recreational Towing ......................387
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .... 387,390
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . 389,392
Reformulated Gasoline .................... 357
Refrigerant ............................441
Reminder, Seat Belt ..................... 41,78
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................22
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........ 270
Replacement Tires ....................... 350
Reporting Safety Defects ................... 513
Restraint, Head ......................... 147
Restraints, Child ..................56,62,93,100
Rotation, Tires ..........................354
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ................109
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............109
Safety Defects, Reporting .................. 513
Safety Information, Tire ................... 335
Safety Tips ............................107
Satellite Radio .......................265,266
Satellite Radio Antenna ................... 269
Schedule, Maintenance ....................488
Seat Belt Maintenance ....................465
Seat Belt Reminder .....................41,78
Seat Belts .....................30,31,67,68,109
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ...... 38,76
And Pregnant Women .................42,79
Child Restraint .................. 56,67,93,105
Extender ........................... 42,80
Front Seat .......................... 31,68
Pretensioners ........................40,78
Reminder ............................ 220
Seats .............................. 144,145
Adjustment ..........................144
Child .............................67,105
Folding Floor ......................... 204
Heated .............................158
INDEX 529
10
Lumbar Support .......................148
Power ...........................149,151
Rear Folding .......................153,155
Reclining .........................146,147
Reclining Rear ........................ 153
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ............. 26,222
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ............. 485
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...................12
Service Assistance ....................... 510
Service Contract .........................512
Service Manuals ........................514
Setting the Clock .............227,230,238,252,265
Shift Speeds ...........................307
Shifting ............................... 299
Automatic Transmission ................. 299
Manual Transmission ................. 304,306
Transfer Case ......................... 311
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) ..................387,390
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) ..................389,392
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage ............38,76
Shoulder Belts ......................... 31,68
Side Airbag ............................. 89
Signals, Turn ...........................166
Sliding Rear Window
Power ...............................29
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................352
Snow Plow ............................ 382
Snow Tires ............................354
Spare Tire .......................... 347,348
Spark Plugs ............................ 436
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .............. 172
Speedometer ........................... 220
Starting ...............................296
Automatic Transmission ................. 296
Engine Block Heater .................... 297
Engine Fails to Start ....................297
530 INDEX
Manual Transmission ...................296
Steering
Column Controls ...................... 166
Column Lock .......................... 14
Linkage .............................442
Power ...........................333,441
Wheel, Tilt ...........................169
Storage, Behind the Seat ................... 199
Storage Compartment, Center Seat ......... 199,200
Storage, Vehicle ......................... 469
Storing Your Vehicle ......................469
Sun Roof ..............................189
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information ........ 352
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................... 434
Tachometer ............................ 219
Tailgate ............................... 209
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ........ 60,63,97,101
Tilt Steering Column ..................... 169
Tire and Loading Information Placard ...... 339,352
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............338
Tire Markings .......................... 335
Tire Safety Information .................... 335
Tires ...........................109,343,515
Aging (Life of Tires) .................... 350
Air Pressure ..........................343
Alignment ...........................351
Chains .............................. 352
Changing ............................403
Compact Spare ........................347
Dual ............................355,412
General Information .................... 343
High Speed .......................... 346
Inflation Pressures ..................... 344
Jacking ............................. 405
Life of Tires .......................... 350
Load Capacity .....................339,340
Quality Grading .......................515
INDEX 531
10
Radial .............................. 346
Replacement ......................... 350
Rotation ............................. 354
Safety ........................... 335,343
Sizes ............................... 336
Snow Tires ...........................354
Spare Tire ...........................404
Spinning ............................348
Tread Wear Indicators ...................349
Wheel Mounting ....................... 405
Wheel Nut Torque ..................... 410
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............373
Torque Converter Clutch .................. 304
Tow Hooks, Emergency ...................420
Towing ...............................370
Disabled Vehicle .......................420
Guide ..............................373
Recreational .......................... 387
Weight ..............................373
Traction ..............................395
Trailer Towing ..........................370
Cooling System Tips ....................380
Hitches .............................372
Minimum Requirements ................. 375
Mirrors ........................... 119,381
Trailer and Tongue Weight ................ 373
Wiring .............................. 378
Trailer Towing Guide ..................... 373
Trailer Weight .......................... 373
Transfer Case ........................... 453
Electronically Shifted ................. 312,320
Fluid ............................... 486
Transmission
Automatic ........................299,454
Fluid ............................... 486
Maintenance ....................... 453,454
Manual .....................296,304,306,453
Shifting .......................... 299,307
532 INDEX
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 183
Tread Wear Indicators .................... 349
Trip Computer .......................... 176
Trip Odometer .......................222,226
Turn Signals ...................166,219,470,474
Underhood Fuses ........................466
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................ 515
Universal Transmitter .....................183
Variance, Compass .......................182
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6
Vehicle Loading ...................... 340,367
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............7
Vehicle Storage .........................469
Video Entertainment System
(Rear Seat Video System) .................. 266
Voltmeter .............................219
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) ............. 219
Warnings and Cautions ..................... 5
Warranty Information ..................... 513
Washers, Windshield .................. 168,444
Washing Vehicle ......................... 462
Wheel Alignment and Balance ............... 351
Wheel and Wheel Trim .................... 463
Wheel Changing ........................ 403
Wheel Cover ........................... 411
Wheel Mounting ........................ 405
Wheel Nut Torque ....................410,414
Wind Buffeting .......................30,192
Window Airbag (Side Curtain) ............... 89
Window Fogging ........................ 285
Windows ..............................28
Power ...............................28
Rear Sliding ........................... 30
Windshield Defroster ..................275,278
INDEX 533
10
Windshield Washers ................167,168,444
Fluid ............................167,444
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................444
Windshield Wipers ....................... 167
Wiper Blade Replacement .................. 444
Wipers, Intermittent ...................... 168
534 INDEX
NOTES
NOTES
